Introduce basic_safe_range
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset ARM
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset M68HC11
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68K
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset MIPS
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset S/390
160 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset SPU
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset TICOFF
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset WIN32
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset XTENSA
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173 @end ifset
174 @end ifclear
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
176 * BFD:: BFD
177 @end ifclear
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifnottex
186
187 @node Overview
188 @chapter Overview
189
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
192
193 @ifset man
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
196 @c man end
197
198 @c man begin SEEALSO
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201 @file{ld}.
202 @c man end
203 @end ifset
204
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
210
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
215 @ifset man
216 @c For the man only
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
220 @end ifset
221
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228 @end ifclear
229
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
236 @c man end
237
238 @node Invocation
239 @chapter Invocation
240
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
247 @c man end
248
249 @ifset UsesEnvVars
250 @menu
251 * Options:: Command-line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
253 @end menu
254
255 @node Options
256 @section Command-line Options
257 @end ifset
258
259 @cindex command line
260 @cindex options
261
262 @c man begin OPTIONS
263
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271 @smallexample
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273 @end smallexample
274
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
289
290 @cindex object files
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
295
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
301
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
313
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
318
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326 output.
327
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333 accepted.
334
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
339
340 @smallexample
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
342 @end smallexample
343
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352 @smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354 @end smallexample
355
356 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
357 linker:
358
359 @table @gcctabopt
360 @include at-file.texi
361
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
379 interface.
380
381 @ifclear SingleFormat
382 @cindex binary input format
383 @kindex -b @var{format}
384 @kindex --format=@var{format}
385 @cindex input format
386 @cindex input format
387 @item -b @var{input-format}
388 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
389 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
391 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
392 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
393 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
394 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
395 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399 @xref{BFD}.
400
401 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403 linking object files of different formats), by including
404 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
405 particular format.
406
407 The default format is taken from the environment variable
408 @code{GNUTARGET}.
409 @ifset UsesEnvVars
410 @xref{Environment}.
411 @end ifset
412 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
413 @code{TARGET};
414 @ifclear man
415 see @ref{Format Commands}.
416 @end ifclear
417 @end ifclear
418
419 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @cindex compatibility, MRI
422 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
424 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
425 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
426 @ifclear man
427 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428 @end ifclear
429 @ifset man
430 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431 @end ifset
432 Introduce MRI script files with
433 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
434 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
436 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438 @cindex common allocation
439 @kindex -d
440 @kindex -dc
441 @kindex -dp
442 @item -d
443 @itemx -dc
444 @itemx -dp
445 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
451 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
460 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
461
462 @cindex entry point, from command line
463 @kindex -e @var{entry}
464 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
465 @item -e @var{entry}
466 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
475 @kindex --exclude-libs
476 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
478 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
479 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484 be treated as hidden.
485
486 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497 regardless of this option.
498
499 @cindex dynamic symbol table
500 @kindex -E
501 @kindex --export-dynamic
502 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
503 @item -E
504 @itemx --export-dynamic
505 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
506 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
515
516 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519 linking the program itself.
520
521 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
522 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
523 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
524
525 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
529 @ifclear SingleFormat
530 @cindex big-endian objects
531 @cindex endianness
532 @kindex -EB
533 @item -EB
534 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536 @cindex little-endian objects
537 @kindex -EL
538 @item -EL
539 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
540 @end ifclear
541
542 @kindex -f @var{name}
543 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544 @item -f @var{name}
545 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
546 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559 machine-specific performance.
560
561 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
564 @kindex -F @var{name}
565 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
566 @item -F @var{name}
567 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
568 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579 @var{name}.
580
581 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
582 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
583 object files.
584 @ifclear SingleFormat
585 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
586 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
587 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
588 environment variable.
589 @end ifclear
590 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591 creating an ELF shared object.
592
593 @cindex finalization function
594 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
595 @item -fini=@var{name}
596 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599 the function to call.
600
601 @kindex -g
602 @item -g
603 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
605 @kindex -G @var{value}
606 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
607 @cindex object size
608 @item -G @var{value}
609 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
612 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
613 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615 @cindex runtime library name
616 @kindex -h @var{name}
617 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
618 @item -h @var{name}
619 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
620 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626 @kindex -i
627 @cindex incremental link
628 @item -i
629 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
631 @cindex initialization function
632 @kindex -init=@var{name}
633 @item -init=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637 function to call.
638
639 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
640 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
641 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
642 @item -l @var{namespec}
643 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
647 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
648 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
649
650 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
651 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657 @var{filename}.
658
659 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
666 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
667 archives multiple times.
668
669 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671 @ifset GENERIC
672 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
673 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
674 behaviour of the AIX linker.
675 @end ifset
676
677 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
678 @kindex -L @var{dir}
679 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
680 @item -L @var{searchdir}
681 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
682 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
684 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
687 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
688 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690 option is specified.
691
692 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
695
696 @ifset UsesEnvVars
697 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
698 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
699 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700 @end ifset
701
702 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706 @cindex emulation
707 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
708 @item -m @var{emulation}
709 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716 configured.
717
718 @cindex link map
719 @kindex -M
720 @kindex --print-map
721 @item -M
722 @itemx --print-map
723 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724 information about the link, including the following:
725
726 @itemize @bullet
727 @item
728 Where object files are mapped into memory.
729 @item
730 How common symbols are allocated.
731 @item
732 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
734 @item
735 The values assigned to symbols.
736
737 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743 linker script containing:
744
745 @smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749 @end smallexample
750
751 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752 option is used:
753
754 @smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758 @end smallexample
759
760 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761 scripts.
762
763 @item
764 How GNU properties are merged.
765
766 When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
767 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
768 These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
769
770 @smallexample
771 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
772 @end smallexample
773
774 This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
775 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
776 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
777
778 @smallexample
779 Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
780 @end smallexample
781
782 This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
783 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
784 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
785 @end itemize
786
787 @cindex link map discarded
788 @kindex --print-map-discarded
789 @kindex --no-print-map-discarded
790 @item --print-map-discarded
791 @itemx --no-print-map-discarded
792 Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
793 in the link map. Enabled by default.
794
795 @kindex -n
796 @cindex read-only text
797 @cindex NMAGIC
798 @kindex --nmagic
799 @item -n
800 @itemx --nmagic
801 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
802 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
804
805 @kindex -N
806 @kindex --omagic
807 @cindex read/write from cmd line
808 @cindex OMAGIC
809 @item -N
810 @itemx --omagic
811 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
812 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
813 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
814 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
815 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
816 specification published by Microsoft.
817
818 @kindex --no-omagic
819 @cindex OMAGIC
820 @item --no-omagic
821 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
822 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
823 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
824 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
825
826 @kindex -o @var{output}
827 @kindex --output=@var{output}
828 @cindex naming the output file
829 @item -o @var{output}
830 @itemx --output=@var{output}
831 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
832 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
833 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
834
835 @kindex -O @var{level}
836 @cindex generating optimized output
837 @item -O @var{level}
838 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
839 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
840 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
841 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
842 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
843 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
844 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
845
846 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
847 @item -plugin @var{name}
848 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
849 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
850 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
851 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
852 wish.
853
854 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
855 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
856 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
857 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
858 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
859 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
860 just copy in the newest one.
861
862 @kindex --push-state
863 @cindex push state governing input file handling
864 @item --push-state
865 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
866 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
867 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
868
869 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
870 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
871 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
872 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
873 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
874 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
875
876 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
877 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
878 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
879 something as follows:
880
881 @smallexample
882 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
883 @end smallexample
884
885 @kindex --pop-state
886 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
887 @item --pop-state
888 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
889 flags governing input file handling.
890
891 @kindex -q
892 @kindex --emit-relocs
893 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
894 @item -q
895 @itemx --emit-relocs
896 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
897 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
898 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
899 in larger executables.
900
901 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
902
903 @kindex --force-dynamic
904 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
905 @item --force-dynamic
906 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
907 to VxWorks targets.
908
909 @cindex partial link
910 @cindex relocatable output
911 @kindex -r
912 @kindex --relocatable
913 @item -r
914 @itemx --relocatable
915 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
916 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
917 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
918 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
919 @code{OMAGIC}.
920 @c ; see @option{-N}.
921 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
922 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
923 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
924
925 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
926 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
927 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
928 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
929 with input files in other formats at all.
930
931 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
932
933 @kindex -R @var{file}
934 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
935 @cindex symbol-only input
936 @item -R @var{filename}
937 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
938 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
939 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
940 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
941 programs. You may use this option more than once.
942
943 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
944 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
945 the @option{-rpath} option.
946
947 @kindex -s
948 @kindex --strip-all
949 @cindex strip all symbols
950 @item -s
951 @itemx --strip-all
952 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
953
954 @kindex -S
955 @kindex --strip-debug
956 @cindex strip debugger symbols
957 @item -S
958 @itemx --strip-debug
959 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
960
961 @kindex --strip-discarded
962 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
963 @item --strip-discarded
964 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
965 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
966 Enabled by default.
967
968 @kindex -t
969 @kindex --trace
970 @cindex input files, displaying
971 @item -t
972 @itemx --trace
973 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
974 @samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
975 @samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
976 and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
977 a linker bug report.
978
979 @kindex -T @var{script}
980 @kindex --script=@var{script}
981 @cindex script files
982 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
983 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
984 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
985 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
986 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
987 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
988 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
989 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
990 options accumulate.
991
992 @kindex -dT @var{script}
993 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
994 @cindex script files
995 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
996 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
997 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
998
999 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1000 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1001 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1002 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1003 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1004 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1005 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1006 @samp{gcc}).
1007
1008 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
1009 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1010 @cindex undefined symbol
1011 @item -u @var{symbol}
1012 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1013 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1014 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1015 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1016 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1017 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1018
1019 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1020 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1021 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1022 instead.
1023
1024 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1025 @cindex symbols, require defined
1026 @cindex defined symbol
1027 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1028 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1029 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1030 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1031 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1032 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1033 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1034
1035 @kindex -Ur
1036 @cindex constructors
1037 @item -Ur
1038 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1039 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1040 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1041 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1042 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1043 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1044 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1045 @samp{-r} for the others.
1046
1047 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1048 @cindex orphan sections
1049 @cindex sections, orphan
1050 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1051 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1052 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1053
1054 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1055
1056 @table @code
1057 @item place
1058 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1059 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1060 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1061
1062 @item discard
1063 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1064 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1065
1066 @item warn
1067 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1068 issue a warning.
1069
1070 @item error
1071 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1072 @end table
1073
1074 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1075
1076 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1078 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1079 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1080 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1081 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1082 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1083 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1084 in a linker script.
1085
1086 @kindex -v
1087 @kindex -V
1088 @kindex --version
1089 @cindex version
1090 @item -v
1091 @itemx --version
1092 @itemx -V
1093 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1094 lists the supported emulations.
1095
1096 @kindex -x
1097 @kindex --discard-all
1098 @cindex deleting local symbols
1099 @item -x
1100 @itemx --discard-all
1101 Delete all local symbols.
1102
1103 @kindex -X
1104 @kindex --discard-locals
1105 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1106 @item -X
1107 @itemx --discard-locals
1108 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1109 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1110 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1111
1112 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1113 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1114 @cindex symbol tracing
1115 @item -y @var{symbol}
1116 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1117 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1118 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1119 to prepend an underscore.
1120
1121 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1122 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1123
1124 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1125 @item -Y @var{path}
1126 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1127 for Solaris compatibility.
1128
1129 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1130 @item -z @var{keyword}
1131 The recognized keywords are:
1132 @table @samp
1133
1134 @item bndplt
1135 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1136
1137 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1138 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1139 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1140 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1141 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1142 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1143 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1144 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1145 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1146 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1147 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1148
1149 @item cet-report=none
1150 @itemx cet-report=warning
1151 @itemx cet-report=error
1152 Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1153 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1154 section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1155 linker not report missing properties in input files.
1156 @option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1157 missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1158 the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1159 Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1160 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1161 turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1162 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
1164 @item combreloc
1165 @itemx nocombreloc
1166 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1167 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1168
1169 @item common
1170 @itemx nocommon
1171 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1172 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1173
1174 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1175 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1176 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1177 using pages of this size.
1178
1179 @item defs
1180 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1181 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1182 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1183
1184 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1185 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1186 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1187 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1188 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1189 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1190 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1191 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1192 these options.
1193
1194 @item execstack
1195 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1196
1197 @item global
1198 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1199 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1200 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1201
1202 @item globalaudit
1203 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1204 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1205 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1206 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1207 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1208 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1209
1210 @item ibtplt
1211 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1212 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1213
1214 @item ibt
1215 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1216 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1217 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1218
1219 @item initfirst
1220 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1221 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1222 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1223 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1224 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1225 objects.
1226
1227 @item interpose
1228 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1229 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1230 libraries not so marked.
1231
1232 @item lazy
1233 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1234 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1235 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1236 Lazy binding is the default.
1237
1238 @item loadfltr
1239 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1240
1241 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1242 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1243
1244 @item muldefs
1245 Allow multiple definitions.
1246
1247 @item nocopyreloc
1248 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1249 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1250
1251 @item nodefaultlib
1252 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1253 should ignore any default library search paths.
1254
1255 @item nodelete
1256 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1257
1258 @item nodlopen
1259 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1260
1261 @item nodump
1262 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1263
1264 @item noexecstack
1265 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1266
1267 @item noextern-protected-data
1268 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1269 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1270 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1271 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1272 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1273 i386 and x86-64.
1274
1275 @item noreloc-overflow
1276 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1277 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1278 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1279
1280 @item now
1281 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1282 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1283 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1284 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1285 called.
1286
1287 @item origin
1288 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1289
1290 @item relro
1291 @itemx norelro
1292 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1293 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1294 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1295 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1296 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1297
1298 @item separate-code
1299 @itemx noseparate-code
1300 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1301 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1302 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1303 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1304
1305 @item shstk
1306 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1307 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1308 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1309
1310 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1311 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1312 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1313 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1314
1315 @item text
1316 @itemx notext
1317 @itemx textoff
1318 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1319 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1320 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1321
1322 @item undefs
1323 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1324 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1325 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1326
1327 @end table
1328
1329 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1330
1331 @kindex -(
1332 @cindex groups of archives
1333 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1334 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1335 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1336 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1337
1338 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1339 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1340 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1341 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1342 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1343 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1344 they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1345 resolved.
1346
1347 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1348 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1349 more archives.
1350
1351 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1352 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1353 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1354 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1355 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1356 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1357 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1358 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1359 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1360 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1361 restore the old behaviour.
1362
1363 @kindex --as-needed
1364 @kindex --no-as-needed
1365 @item --as-needed
1366 @itemx --no-as-needed
1367 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1368 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1369 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1370 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1371 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1372 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1373 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1374 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1375 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1376 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1377 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1378 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1379 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1380
1381 @kindex --add-needed
1382 @kindex --no-add-needed
1383 @item --add-needed
1384 @itemx --no-add-needed
1385 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1386 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1387 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1388 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1389
1390 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1391 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1392 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1393
1394 @kindex -Bdynamic
1395 @kindex -dy
1396 @kindex -call_shared
1397 @item -Bdynamic
1398 @itemx -dy
1399 @itemx -call_shared
1400 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1401 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1402 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1403 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1404 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1405 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1406
1407 @kindex -Bgroup
1408 @item -Bgroup
1409 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1410 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1411 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1412 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1413 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1414
1415 @kindex -Bstatic
1416 @kindex -dn
1417 @kindex -non_shared
1418 @kindex -static
1419 @item -Bstatic
1420 @itemx -dn
1421 @itemx -non_shared
1422 @itemx -static
1423 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1424 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1425 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1426 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1427 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1428 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1429 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1430 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1431 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1432 libraries.
1433
1434 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1435 @item -Bsymbolic
1436 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1437 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1438 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1439 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1440 platforms which support shared libraries.
1441
1442 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1443 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1444 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1445 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1446 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1447 libraries.
1448
1449 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1450 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1451 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1452 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1453 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1454 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1455 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1456 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1457 which support shared libraries.
1458
1459 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1460 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1461
1462 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1463 @item --dynamic-list-data
1464 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1465
1466 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1467 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1468 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1469 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1470
1471 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1472 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1473 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1474
1475 @kindex --check-sections
1476 @kindex --no-check-sections
1477 @item --check-sections
1478 @itemx --no-check-sections
1479 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1480 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1481 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1482 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1483 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1484 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1485 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1486 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1487 option.
1488
1489 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1490 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1491 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1492 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1493 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1494 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1495 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1496 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1497 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1498 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1499 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1500 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1501
1502 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1503 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1504 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1505 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1506 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1507 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1508 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1509 symbols.
1510
1511 @cindex cross reference table
1512 @kindex --cref
1513 @item --cref
1514 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1515 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1516 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1517
1518 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1519 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1520 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1521 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1522 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1523 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1524 symbol are listed.
1525
1526 @cindex common allocation
1527 @kindex --no-define-common
1528 @item --no-define-common
1529 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1530 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1531 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1532
1533 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1534 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1535 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1536 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1537 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1538 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1539 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1540 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1541 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1542 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1543
1544 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1545 @cindex section groups
1546 @cindex COMDAT
1547 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1548 @item --force-group-allocation
1549 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1550 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1551 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1552 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1553 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1554 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1555
1556 @cindex symbols, from command line
1557 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1558 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1559 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1560 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1561 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1562 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1563 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1564 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1565 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1566 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1567 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1568 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1569
1570 @cindex demangling, from command line
1571 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1572 @kindex --no-demangle
1573 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1574 @itemx --no-demangle
1575 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1576 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1577 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1578 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1579 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1580 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1581 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1582 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1583 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1584
1585 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1586 @kindex -I@var{file}
1587 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1588 @item -I@var{file}
1589 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1590 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1591 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1592 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1593 doing.
1594
1595 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1596 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1597 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1598 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1599 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1600 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1601
1602 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1603 @item --embedded-relocs
1604 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1605 that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
1606 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1607 targets.
1608
1609 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1610 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1611 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1612 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1613
1614 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1615 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1616 @item --fatal-warnings
1617 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1618 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1619 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1620
1621 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1622 @item --force-exe-suffix
1623 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1624
1625 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1626 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1627 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1628 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1629 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1630 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1631
1632 @kindex --gc-sections
1633 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1634 @cindex garbage collection
1635 @item --gc-sections
1636 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1637 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1638 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1639 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1640 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1641 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1642 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1643
1644 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1645 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1646 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1647 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1648 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1649 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1650 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1651 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1652 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1653 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1654
1655 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1656 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1657 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1658 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1659 command in the linker script.
1660
1661 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1662 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1663 @cindex garbage collection
1664 @item --print-gc-sections
1665 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1666 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1667 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1668 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1669 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1670 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1671 line.
1672
1673 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1674 @cindex garbage collection
1675 @item --gc-keep-exported
1676 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1677 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1678 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1679 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1680 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1681 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1682 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1683 ELF format targets.
1684
1685 @kindex --print-output-format
1686 @cindex output format
1687 @item --print-output-format
1688 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1689 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1690 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1691
1692 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1693 @cindex memory usage
1694 @item --print-memory-usage
1695 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1696 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1697 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1698 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1699 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1700
1701 @smallexample
1702 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1703 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1704 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1705 @end smallexample
1706
1707 @cindex help
1708 @cindex usage
1709 @kindex --help
1710 @item --help
1711 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1712
1713 @kindex --target-help
1714 @item --target-help
1715 Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
1716
1717 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1718 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1719 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1720 @option{-M} option, above.
1721
1722 @cindex memory usage
1723 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1724 @item --no-keep-memory
1725 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1726 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1727 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1728 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1729 while linking a large executable.
1730
1731 @kindex --no-undefined
1732 @kindex -z defs
1733 @kindex -z undefs
1734 @item --no-undefined
1735 @itemx -z defs
1736 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1737 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1738 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1739 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1740 libraries being linked in.
1741
1742 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1743
1744 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1745 @kindex -z muldefs
1746 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1747 @itemx -z muldefs
1748 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1749 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1750 first definition will be used.
1751
1752 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1753 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1754 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1755 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1756 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1757 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1758 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1759 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1760 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1761
1762 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1763 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1764 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1765 a shared library.
1766
1767 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1768 libraries specified at link time are that:
1769
1770 @itemize @bullet
1771 @item
1772 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1773 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1774 resolvable at load time.
1775 @item
1776 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1777 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1778
1779 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1780 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1781 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1782 appropriate memset function.
1783 @end itemize
1784
1785 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1786 @item --no-undefined-version
1787 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1788 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1789 will be issued instead.
1790
1791 @kindex --default-symver
1792 @item --default-symver
1793 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1794 exported symbols.
1795
1796 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1797 @item --default-imported-symver
1798 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1799 imported symbols.
1800
1801 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1802 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1803 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1804 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1805 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1806 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1807 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1808 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1809 inappropriate.
1810
1811 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1812 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1813 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1814 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1815
1816 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1817 @item --no-whole-archive
1818 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1819 archive files.
1820
1821 @cindex output file after errors
1822 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1823 @item --noinhibit-exec
1824 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1825 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1826 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1827 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1828
1829 @kindex -nostdlib
1830 @item -nostdlib
1831 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1832 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1833 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1834
1835 @ifclear SingleFormat
1836 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1837 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1838 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1839 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1840 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1841 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1842 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1843 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1844 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1845 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1846 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1847 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1848 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1849 @end ifclear
1850
1851 @kindex --out-implib
1852 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1853 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1854 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1855 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1856 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1857 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1858 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1859 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1860
1861 @kindex -pie
1862 @kindex --pic-executable
1863 @item -pie
1864 @itemx --pic-executable
1865 @cindex position independent executables
1866 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1867 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1868 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1869 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1870 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1871 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1872
1873 @kindex -qmagic
1874 @item -qmagic
1875 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1876
1877 @kindex -Qy
1878 @item -Qy
1879 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1880
1881 @kindex --relax
1882 @cindex synthesizing linker
1883 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1884 @cindex --no-relax
1885 @item --relax
1886 @itemx --no-relax
1887 An option with machine dependent effects.
1888 @ifset GENERIC
1889 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1890 @end ifset
1891 @ifset H8300
1892 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1893 @end ifset
1894 @ifset XTENSA
1895 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1896 @end ifset
1897 @ifset M68HC11
1898 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1899 @end ifset
1900 @ifset NIOSII
1901 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1902 @end ifset
1903 @ifset POWERPC
1904 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1905 @end ifset
1906
1907 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
1908 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1909 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1910 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1911 instructions, and combining constant values.
1912
1913 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1914 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1915 @ifset GENERIC
1916 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1917 family of processors.
1918 @end ifset
1919
1920 @ifset GENERIC
1921 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1922 but ignored.
1923 @end ifset
1924
1925 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1926 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1927
1928 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1929 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1930 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1931 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1932 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1933 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1934 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1935 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1936 @ifset GENERIC
1937 (such as VxWorks)
1938 @end ifset
1939 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1940 run-time memory.
1941
1942 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1943 or symbols needed for relocations.
1944
1945 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1946 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1947
1948 @ifset GENERIC
1949 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1950 @cindex runtime library search path
1951 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1952 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1953 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1954 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1955 them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1956
1957 The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
1958 are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
1959 description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
1960 in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
1961 have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1962
1963 If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
1964 contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
1965 is defined.
1966
1967 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1968 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1969 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1970 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1971 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1972 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1973 file systems.
1974
1975 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1976 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1977 the @option{-rpath} option.
1978 @end ifset
1979
1980 @ifset GENERIC
1981 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1982 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1983 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1984 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1985 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1986 of the input files.
1987
1988 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1989 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1990 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1991 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1992 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1993 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1994 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1995 appearing multiple times.
1996
1997 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1998 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1999 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2000 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
2001 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2002
2003 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2004 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2005 supported.
2006
2007 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2008 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2009 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2010 runtime linker would do.
2011
2012 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2013 libraries:
2014 @enumerate
2015 @item
2016 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2017 @item
2018 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2019 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2020 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2021 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2022 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2023 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2024 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2025 @item
2026 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2027 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2028 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2029 @item
2030 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2031 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2032 @item
2033 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2034 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2035 @item
2036 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2037 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2038 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2039 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2040 @item
2041 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2042 @item
2043 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2044 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2045 @end enumerate
2046
2047 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2048 warning and continue with the link.
2049 @end ifset
2050
2051 @kindex -shared
2052 @kindex -Bshareable
2053 @item -shared
2054 @itemx -Bshareable
2055 @cindex shared libraries
2056 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2057 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2058 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2059 undefined symbols in the link.
2060
2061 @kindex --sort-common
2062 @item --sort-common
2063 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2064 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2065 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2066 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2067 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2068 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2069 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2070 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2071
2072 @kindex --sort-section=name
2073 @item --sort-section=name
2074 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2075 patterns in the linker script.
2076
2077 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2078 @item --sort-section=alignment
2079 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2080 patterns in the linker script.
2081
2082 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2083 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2084 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2085 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2086 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2087
2088 @kindex --split-by-file
2089 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2090 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2091 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2092 size of 1 if not given.
2093
2094 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2095 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2096 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2097 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2098 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2099 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2100 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2101 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2102 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2103 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2104 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2105 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2106
2107 @kindex --stats
2108 @item --stats
2109 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2110 as execution time and memory usage.
2111
2112 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2113 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2114 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2115 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2116 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2117
2118 @kindex --task-link
2119 @item --task-link
2120 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2121 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2122
2123 @kindex --traditional-format
2124 @cindex traditional format
2125 @item --traditional-format
2126 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2127 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2128 use the traditional format instead.
2129
2130 @cindex dbx
2131 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2132 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2133 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2134 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2135 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2136 combine duplicate entries.
2137
2138 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2139 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2140 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2141 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2142 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2143 line.
2144 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2145 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2146 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2147 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2148 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2149
2150 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2151 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2152 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2153 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2154 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2155 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2156 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2157 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2158 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2159
2160 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2161 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2162 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2163 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2164 byte of the text segment.
2165
2166 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2167 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2168 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2169 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2170 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2171 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2172
2173 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2174 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2175 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2176 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2177 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2178
2179 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2180 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2181 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2182 values for @samp{method}:
2183
2184 @table @samp
2185 @item ignore-all
2186 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2187
2188 @item report-all
2189 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2190
2191 @item ignore-in-object-files
2192 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2193 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2194
2195 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2196 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2197 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2198 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2199 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2200 command line.
2201 @end table
2202
2203 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2204 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2205
2206 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2207 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2208 can change this to a warning.
2209
2210 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2211 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2212 @item --dll-verbose
2213 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2214 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2215 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2216 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2217 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2218
2219 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2220 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2221 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2222 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2223 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2224 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2225 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2226 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2227 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2228 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2229 @xref{WIN32}.
2230
2231 @kindex --warn-common
2232 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2233 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2234 @item --warn-common
2235 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2236 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2237 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2238 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2239 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2240 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2241
2242 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2243
2244 @table @samp
2245 @item int i = 1;
2246 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2247 file.
2248
2249 @item extern int i;
2250 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2251 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2252 variable somewhere.
2253
2254 @item int i;
2255 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2256 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2257 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2258 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2259 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2260 a definition of the same variable.
2261 @end table
2262
2263 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2264 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2265 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2266 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2267 a common symbol.
2268
2269 @enumerate
2270 @item
2271 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2272 definition for the symbol.
2273 @smallexample
2274 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2275 overridden by definition
2276 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2277 @end smallexample
2278
2279 @item
2280 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2281 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2282 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2283 @smallexample
2284 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2285 overriding common
2286 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2287 @end smallexample
2288
2289 @item
2290 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2291 @smallexample
2292 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2293 of `@var{symbol}'
2294 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2295 @end smallexample
2296
2297 @item
2298 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2299 @smallexample
2300 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2301 overridden by larger common
2302 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2303 @end smallexample
2304
2305 @item
2306 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2307 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2308 encountered in a different order.
2309 @smallexample
2310 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2311 overriding smaller common
2312 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2313 @end smallexample
2314 @end enumerate
2315
2316 @kindex --warn-constructors
2317 @item --warn-constructors
2318 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2319 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2320 detect the use of global constructors.
2321
2322 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2323 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2324 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2325 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2326 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2327 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2328 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2329 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2330 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2331 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2332 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2333 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2334 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2335
2336 @kindex --warn-once
2337 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2338 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2339 @item --warn-once
2340 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2341 which refers to it.
2342
2343 @kindex --warn-section-align
2344 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2345 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2346 @item --warn-section-align
2347 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2348 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2349 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2350 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2351 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2352
2353 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2354 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2355 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2356
2357 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2358 @item --warn-alternate-em
2359 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2360
2361 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2362 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2363 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2364 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2365 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2366
2367 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2368 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2369 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2370 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2371
2372 @kindex --whole-archive
2373 @cindex including an entire archive
2374 @item --whole-archive
2375 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2376 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2377 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2378 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2379 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2380 library. This option may be used more than once.
2381
2382 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2383 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2384 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2385 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2386 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2387
2388 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2389 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2390 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2391 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2392 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2393 @var{symbol}.
2394
2395 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2396 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2397 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2398 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2399
2400 Here is a trivial example:
2401
2402 @smallexample
2403 void *
2404 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2405 @{
2406 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2407 return __real_malloc (c);
2408 @}
2409 @end smallexample
2410
2411 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2412 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2413 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2414 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2415
2416 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2417 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2418 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2419 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2420 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2421
2422 Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2423 internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2424 @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2425 @code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2426
2427 @smallexample
2428 int
2429 f (void)
2430 @{
2431 return 123;
2432 @}
2433
2434 int
2435 g (void)
2436 @{
2437 return f();
2438 @}
2439 @end smallexample
2440
2441 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2442 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2443 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2444 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2445 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2446 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2447 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2448
2449 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2450 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2451 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2452 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2453 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2454
2455 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2456 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2457 @item --enable-new-dtags
2458 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2459 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2460 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2461 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2462 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2463 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2464 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2465 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2466
2467 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2468 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2469 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2470 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2471 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2472 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2473 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2474
2475 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2476 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2477 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2478 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2479 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2480 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2481 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2482 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2483
2484 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2485 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2486 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2487 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2488 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2489 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2490 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2491 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2492 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2493 compressed using zlib.
2494
2495 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2496 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2497 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2498 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2499 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2500 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2501
2502 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2503 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2504
2505 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2506 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2507 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2508 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2509
2510 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2511 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2512 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2513 @option{--help} option.
2514
2515 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2516 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2517 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2518 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2519 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2520 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2521
2522 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2523 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2524 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2525 has been used.
2526
2527 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2528 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2529
2530 @kindex --build-id
2531 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2532 @item --build-id
2533 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2534 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2535 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2536 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2537 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2538 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2539 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2540 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2541 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2542 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2543 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2544
2545 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2546 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2547 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2548 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2549 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2550 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2551
2552 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2553 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2554 @end table
2555
2556 @c man end
2557
2558 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2559
2560 @c man begin OPTIONS
2561
2562 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2563 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2564 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2565 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2566 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2567 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2568 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2569 object file).
2570
2571 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2572 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2573 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2574 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2575
2576 @table @gcctabopt
2577
2578 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2579 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2580 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2581 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2582 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2583
2584 @kindex --base-file
2585 @item --base-file @var{file}
2586 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2587 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2588 @file{dlltool}.
2589 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2590
2591 @kindex --dll
2592 @item --dll
2593 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2594 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2595 file.
2596 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2597
2598 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2599 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2600 @item --enable-long-section-names
2601 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2602 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2603 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2604 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2605 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2606 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2607 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2608 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2609 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2610 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2611 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2612 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2613 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2614 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2615 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2616 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2617 image and not stripping symbols.
2618 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2619
2620 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2621 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2622 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2623 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2624 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2625 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2626 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2627 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2628 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2629 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2630 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2631 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2632 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2633 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2634 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2635 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2636 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2637 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2638
2639 @kindex --leading-underscore
2640 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2641 @item --leading-underscore
2642 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2643 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2644 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2645 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2646
2647 @cindex DLLs, creating
2648 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2649 @item --export-all-symbols
2650 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2651 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2652 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2653 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2654 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2655 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2656 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2657 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2658 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2659 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2660 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2661 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2662 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2663 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2664 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2665 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2666 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2667 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2668 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2669 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2670 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2671 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2672 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2673
2674 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2675 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2676 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2677 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2678 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2679
2680 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2681 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2682 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2683 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684
2685 @kindex --file-alignment
2686 @item --file-alignment
2687 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2688 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2689 512.
2690 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2691
2692 @cindex heap size
2693 @kindex --heap
2694 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2695 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2696 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2697 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2698 committed.
2699 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2700
2701 @cindex image base
2702 @kindex --image-base
2703 @item --image-base @var{value}
2704 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2705 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2706 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2707 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2708 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2709 for dlls.
2710 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2711
2712 @kindex --kill-at
2713 @item --kill-at
2714 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2715 symbols before they are exported.
2716 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2717
2718 @kindex --large-address-aware
2719 @item --large-address-aware
2720 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2721 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2722 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2723 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2724 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2725 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2726
2727 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2728 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2729 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2730 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2731 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2732 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2733 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2734
2735 @kindex --major-image-version
2736 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2737 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2738 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2739
2740 @kindex --major-os-version
2741 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2742 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2743 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2744
2745 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2746 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2747 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2748 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2749
2750 @kindex --minor-image-version
2751 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2752 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2753 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2754
2755 @kindex --minor-os-version
2756 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2757 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2758 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2759
2760 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2761 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2762 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2763 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2764
2765 @cindex DEF files, creating
2766 @cindex DLLs, creating
2767 @kindex --output-def
2768 @item --output-def @var{file}
2769 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2770 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2771 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2772 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2773 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2774 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2775
2776 @cindex DLLs, creating
2777 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2778 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2779 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2780 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2781 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2782 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2783 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2784 execution are avoided.
2785 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2786
2787 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2788 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2789 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2790 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2791 default.
2792 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2793
2794 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2795 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2796 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2797 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2798 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2799 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2800 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2801 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2802 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2803 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2804
2805 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2806 @item --enable-auto-import
2807 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2808 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2809 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2810 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2811
2812 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2813 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2814
2815 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2816 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2817 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2818
2819 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2820 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2821 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2822 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2823 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2824
2825 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2826 see this message:
2827
2828 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2829 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2830
2831 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2832 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2833 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2834 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2835 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2836 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2837 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2838 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2839 the warning, and exit.
2840
2841 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2842 data type of the exported variable:
2843
2844 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2845 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2846 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2847
2848 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2849 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2850 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2851 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2852
2853 @example
2854 extern type extern_array[];
2855 extern_array[1] -->
2856 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2857 @end example
2858
2859 or
2860
2861 @example
2862 extern type extern_array[];
2863 extern_array[1] -->
2864 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2865 @end example
2866
2867 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2868 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2869
2870 @example
2871 extern struct s extern_struct;
2872 extern_struct.field -->
2873 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2874 @end example
2875
2876 or
2877
2878 @example
2879 extern long long extern_ll;
2880 extern_ll -->
2881 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2882 @end example
2883
2884 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2885 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2886 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2887 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2888 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2889 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2890 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2891 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2892
2893 Original:
2894 @example
2895 --foo.h
2896 extern int arr[];
2897 --foo.c
2898 #include "foo.h"
2899 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2900 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2901 @}
2902 @end example
2903
2904 Solution 1:
2905 @example
2906 --foo.h
2907 extern int arr[];
2908 --foo.c
2909 #include "foo.h"
2910 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2911 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2912 volatile int *parr = arr;
2913 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2914 @}
2915 @end example
2916
2917 Solution 2:
2918 @example
2919 --foo.h
2920 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2921 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2922 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2923 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2924 #else
2925 #define FOO_IMPORT
2926 #endif
2927 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2928 --foo.c
2929 #include "foo.h"
2930 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2931 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2932 @}
2933 @end example
2934
2935 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2936 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2937 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2938 functions).
2939
2940 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2941 @item --disable-auto-import
2942 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2943 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2944 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2945
2946 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2947 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2948 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2949 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2950 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2951 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2952 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2953
2954 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2955 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2956 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2957 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2958
2959 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2960 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2961 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2962 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2963
2964 @kindex --section-alignment
2965 @item --section-alignment
2966 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2967 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2968 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2969
2970 @cindex stack size
2971 @kindex --stack
2972 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2973 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2974 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2975 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2976 committed.
2977 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2978
2979 @kindex --subsystem
2980 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2981 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2982 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2983 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2984 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2985 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2986 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2987 @var{which}.
2988 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2989
2990 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2991 of the PE file header:
2992 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2993
2994 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2995 @item --high-entropy-va
2996 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2997 (ASLR).
2998
2999 @kindex --dynamicbase
3000 @item --dynamicbase
3001 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3002 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3003 Vista for i386 PE targets.
3004
3005 @kindex --forceinteg
3006 @item --forceinteg
3007 Code integrity checks are enforced.
3008
3009 @kindex --nxcompat
3010 @item --nxcompat
3011 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3012 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3013
3014 @kindex --no-isolation
3015 @item --no-isolation
3016 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3017
3018 @kindex --no-seh
3019 @item --no-seh
3020 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3021 this image.
3022
3023 @kindex --no-bind
3024 @item --no-bind
3025 Do not bind this image.
3026
3027 @kindex --wdmdriver
3028 @item --wdmdriver
3029 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3030
3031 @kindex --tsaware
3032 @item --tsaware
3033 The image is Terminal Server aware.
3034
3035 @kindex --insert-timestamp
3036 @item --insert-timestamp
3037 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3038 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3039 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3040 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3041 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3042 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3043 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3044 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3045 identically.
3046 @end table
3047
3048 @c man end
3049
3050 @ifset C6X
3051 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3052
3053 @c man begin OPTIONS
3054
3055 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3056 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3057 all executables use an index of 0.
3058
3059 @table @gcctabopt
3060
3061 @kindex --dsbt-size
3062 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3063 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3064 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3065 entries.
3066
3067 @kindex --dsbt-index
3068 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3069 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3070 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3071 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3072 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3073
3074 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3075 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3076 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3077
3078 @end table
3079
3080 @c man end
3081 @end ifset
3082
3083 @ifset CSKY
3084 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3085
3086 @c man begin OPTIONS
3087
3088 @table @gcctabopt
3089
3090 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3091 @item --branch-stub
3092 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3093 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3094 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3095 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3096 the compiler or assembler.
3097
3098 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3099 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3100 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3101 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3102 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3103 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3104 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3105 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3106 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3107
3108 @end table
3109
3110 @c man end
3111 @end ifset
3112
3113 @ifset M68HC11
3114 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3115
3116 @c man begin OPTIONS
3117
3118 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3119 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3120
3121 @table @gcctabopt
3122
3123 @kindex --no-trampoline
3124 @item --no-trampoline
3125 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3126 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3127 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3128
3129 @kindex --bank-window
3130 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3131 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3132 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3133 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3134 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3135
3136 @end table
3137
3138 @c man end
3139 @end ifset
3140
3141 @ifset M68K
3142 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3143
3144 @c man begin OPTIONS
3145
3146 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3147 when linking for 68K targets.
3148
3149 @table @gcctabopt
3150
3151 @kindex --got
3152 @item --got=@var{type}
3153 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3154 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3155 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3156 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3157
3158 @end table
3159
3160 @c man end
3161 @end ifset
3162
3163 @ifset MIPS
3164 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3165
3166 @c man begin OPTIONS
3167
3168 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3169 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3170 linking for MIPS targets.
3171
3172 @table @gcctabopt
3173
3174 @kindex --insn32
3175 @item --insn32
3176 @kindex --no-insn32
3177 @itemx --no-insn32
3178 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3179 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3180 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3181 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3182 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3183 possible.
3184
3185 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3186 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3187 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3188 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3189 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3190 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3191 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3192 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3193 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3194 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3195 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3196 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3197 an error.
3198
3199 @kindex --compact-branches
3200 @item --compact-branches
3201 @kindex --no-compact-branches
3202 @item --compact-branches
3203 These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3204 in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3205
3206 @end table
3207
3208 @c man end
3209 @end ifset
3210
3211 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3212 @node Environment
3213 @section Environment Variables
3214
3215 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3216
3217 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3218 @ifclear SingleFormat
3219 @code{GNUTARGET},
3220 @end ifclear
3221 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3222
3223 @ifclear SingleFormat
3224 @kindex GNUTARGET
3225 @cindex default input format
3226 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3227 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3228 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3229 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3230 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3231 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3232 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3233 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3234 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3235 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3236 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3237 @end ifclear
3238
3239 @kindex LDEMULATION
3240 @cindex default emulation
3241 @cindex emulation, default
3242 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3243 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3244 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3245 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3246 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3247 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3248 linker was configured.
3249
3250 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3251 @cindex demangling, default
3252 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3253 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3254 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3255 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3256 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3257 options.
3258
3259 @c man end
3260 @end ifset
3261
3262 @node Scripts
3263 @chapter Linker Scripts
3264
3265 @cindex scripts
3266 @cindex linker scripts
3267 @cindex command files
3268 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3269 written in the linker command language.
3270
3271 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3272 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3273 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3274 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3275 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3276 described below.
3277
3278 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3279 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3280 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3281 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3282 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3283
3284 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3285 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3286 default linker script.
3287
3288 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3289 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3290 Linker Scripts}.
3291
3292 @menu
3293 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3294 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3295 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3296 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3297 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3298 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3299 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3300 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3301 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3302 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3303 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3304 @end menu
3305
3306 @node Basic Script Concepts
3307 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3308 @cindex linker script concepts
3309 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3310 describe the linker script language.
3311
3312 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3313 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3314 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3315 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3316 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3317 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3318 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3319 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3320
3321 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3322 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3323 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3324 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3325 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3326 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3327 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3328 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3329 of debugging information.
3330
3331 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3332 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3333 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3334 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3335 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3336 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3337 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3338 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3339 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3340 RAM address would be the VMA.
3341
3342 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3343 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3344
3345 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3346 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3347 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3348 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3349 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3350 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3351 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3352
3353 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3354 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3355 option.
3356
3357 @node Script Format
3358 @section Linker Script Format
3359 @cindex linker script format
3360 Linker scripts are text files.
3361
3362 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3363 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3364 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3365 generally ignored.
3366
3367 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3368 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3369 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3370 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3371 file name.
3372
3373 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3374 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3375 to whitespace.
3376
3377 @node Simple Example
3378 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3379 @cindex linker script example
3380 @cindex example of linker script
3381 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3382
3383 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3384 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3385 memory layout of the output file.
3386
3387 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3388 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3389 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3390 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3391 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3392 your input files.
3393
3394 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3395 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3396 linker script which will do that:
3397 @smallexample
3398 SECTIONS
3399 @{
3400 . = 0x10000;
3401 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3402 . = 0x8000000;
3403 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3404 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3405 @}
3406 @end smallexample
3407
3408 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3409 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3410 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3411
3412 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3413 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3414 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3415 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3416 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3417 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3418 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3419
3420 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3421 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3422 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3423 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3424 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3425 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3426
3427 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3428 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3429 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3430
3431 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3432 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3433 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3434 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3435 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3436 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3437 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3438
3439 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3440 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3441 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3442 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3443 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3444 sections.
3445
3446 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3447
3448 @node Simple Commands
3449 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3450 @cindex linker script simple commands
3451 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3452
3453 @menu
3454 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3455 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3456 @ifclear SingleFormat
3457 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3458 @end ifclear
3459
3460 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3461 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3462 @end menu
3463
3464 @node Entry Point
3465 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3466 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3467 @cindex start of execution
3468 @cindex first instruction
3469 @cindex entry point
3470 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3471 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3472 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3473 @smallexample
3474 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3475 @end smallexample
3476
3477 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3478 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3479 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3480 @itemize @bullet
3481 @item
3482 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3483 @item
3484 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3485 @item
3486 the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3487 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3488 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3489 @item
3490 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3491 @item
3492 The address @code{0}.
3493 @end itemize
3494
3495 @node File Commands
3496 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3497 @cindex linker script file commands
3498 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3499
3500 @table @code
3501 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3502 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3503 @cindex including a linker script
3504 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3505 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3506 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3507 10 levels deep.
3508
3509 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3510 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3511
3512 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3513 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3514 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3515 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3516 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3517 @cindex linker script input object files
3518 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3519 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3520
3521 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3522 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3523 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3524
3525 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3526 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3527
3528 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3529 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3530 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3531 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3532 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3533 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3534 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3535 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3536 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3537 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3538
3539 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3540 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3541 @samp{-l}.
3542
3543 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3544 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3545 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3546
3547 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3548 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3549 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3550 @cindex grouping input files
3551 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3552 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3553 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3554 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3555
3556 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3557 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3558 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3559 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3560 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3561 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3562 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3563 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3564 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3565 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3566 setting afterwards.
3567
3568 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3569 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3570 @cindex output file name in linker script
3571 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3572 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3573 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3574 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3575 precedence.
3576
3577 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3578 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3579
3580 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3581 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3582 @cindex library search path in linker script
3583 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3584 @cindex search path in linker script
3585 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3586 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3587 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3588 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3589 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3590 the command-line option are searched first.
3591
3592 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3593 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3594 @cindex first input file
3595 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3596 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3597 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3598 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3599 first file.
3600 @end table
3601
3602 @ifclear SingleFormat
3603 @node Format Commands
3604 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3605 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3606
3607 @table @code
3608 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3609 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3610 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3611 @cindex output file format in linker script
3612 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3613 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3614 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3615 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3616 line option takes precedence.
3617
3618 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3619 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3620 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3621 desired endianness.
3622
3623 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3624 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3625 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3626 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3627
3628 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3629 command:
3630 @smallexample
3631 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3632 @end smallexample
3633 This says that the default format for the output file is
3634 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3635 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3636 format.
3637
3638 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3639 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3640 @cindex input file format in linker script
3641 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3642 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3643 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3644 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3645 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3646 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3647 @end table
3648 @end ifclear
3649
3650 @node REGION_ALIAS
3651 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3652 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3653 @cindex region alias
3654 @cindex region names
3655
3656 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3657 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3658
3659 @smallexample
3660 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3661 @end smallexample
3662
3663 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3664 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3665 to memory regions. An example follows.
3666
3667 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3668 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3669 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3670 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3671 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3672 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3673 sections:
3674
3675 @itemize @bullet
3676 @item
3677 @code{.text} program code;
3678 @item
3679 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3680 @item
3681 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3682 @item
3683 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3684 @end itemize
3685
3686 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3687 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3688 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3689 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3690 @code{C}:
3691 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3692 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3693 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3694 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3695 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3696 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3697 @end multitable
3698 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3699 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3700 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3701 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3702
3703 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3704 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3705 memory layout:
3706 @smallexample
3707 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3708
3709 SECTIONS
3710 @{
3711 .text :
3712 @{
3713 *(.text)
3714 @} > REGION_TEXT
3715 .rodata :
3716 @{
3717 *(.rodata)
3718 rodata_end = .;
3719 @} > REGION_RODATA
3720 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3721 @{
3722 data_start = .;
3723 *(.data)
3724 @} > REGION_DATA
3725 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3726 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3727 .bss :
3728 @{
3729 *(.bss)
3730 @} > REGION_BSS
3731 @}
3732 @end smallexample
3733
3734 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3735 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3736 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3737 @table @code
3738 @item A
3739 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3740 @smallexample
3741 MEMORY
3742 @{
3743 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3744 @}
3745
3746 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3747 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3748 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3749 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3750 @end smallexample
3751 @item B
3752 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3753 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3754 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3755 @smallexample
3756 MEMORY
3757 @{
3758 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3759 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3760 @}
3761
3762 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3763 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3764 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3765 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3766 @end smallexample
3767 @item C
3768 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3769 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3770 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3771 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3772 @smallexample
3773 MEMORY
3774 @{
3775 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3776 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3777 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3778 @}
3779
3780 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3781 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3782 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3783 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3784 @end smallexample
3785 @end table
3786
3787 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3788 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3789 necessary:
3790 @smallexample
3791 #include <string.h>
3792
3793 extern char data_start [];
3794 extern char data_size [];
3795 extern char data_load_start [];
3796
3797 void copy_data(void)
3798 @{
3799 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3800 @{
3801 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3802 @}
3803 @}
3804 @end smallexample
3805
3806 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3807 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3808 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3809
3810 @table @code
3811 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3812 @kindex ASSERT
3813 @cindex assertion in linker script
3814 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3815 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3816
3817 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3818 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3819 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3820 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3821 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3822
3823 @smallexample
3824 .stack :
3825 @{
3826 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3827 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3828 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3829 @}
3830 @end smallexample
3831
3832 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3833 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3834 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3835
3836 @smallexample
3837 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3838 .stack :
3839 @{
3840 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3841 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3842 @}
3843 @end smallexample
3844
3845 will work.
3846
3847 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3848 @kindex EXTERN
3849 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3850 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3851 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3852 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3853 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3854 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3855
3856 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3857 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3858 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3859 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3860 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3861 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3862
3863 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3864 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3865 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3866 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3867 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3868 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3869
3870 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3871 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3872 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3873 @cindex section groups
3874 @cindex COMDAT
3875 This command has the same effect as the
3876 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3877 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3878 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3879 specified (@samp{-r}).
3880
3881 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3882 @kindex INSERT
3883 @cindex insert user script into default script
3884 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3885 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3886 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3887 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3888 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3889 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3890 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3891 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3892 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3893 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3894 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3895 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3896 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3897
3898 @smallexample
3899 SECTIONS
3900 @{
3901 OVERLAY :
3902 @{
3903 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3904 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3905 @}
3906 @}
3907 INSERT AFTER .text;
3908 @end smallexample
3909
3910 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3911 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3912 @cindex cross references
3913 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3914 references among certain output sections.
3915
3916 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3917 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3918 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3919 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3920 a function defined in the other section.
3921
3922 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3923 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3924 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3925 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3926 names.
3927
3928 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3929 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3930 @cindex cross references
3931 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3932 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3933
3934 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3935 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3936 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3937 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3938 must never call back.
3939
3940 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3941 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3942 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3943 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3944 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3945 names, not input section names.
3946
3947 @ifclear SingleFormat
3948 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3949 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3950 @cindex machine architecture
3951 @cindex architecture
3952 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3953 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3954 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3955 the @samp{-f} option.
3956 @end ifclear
3957
3958 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3959 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3960 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3961 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3962 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3963 @xref{Expression Section}.
3964 @end table
3965
3966 @node Assignments
3967 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3968 @cindex assignment in scripts
3969 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3970 @cindex variables, defining
3971 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3972 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3973
3974 @menu
3975 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3976 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3977 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3978 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3979 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3980 @end menu
3981
3982 @node Simple Assignments
3983 @subsection Simple Assignments
3984
3985 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3986
3987 @table @code
3988 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3989 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3990 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3991 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3992 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3993 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3994 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3995 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3996 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3997 @end table
3998
3999 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4000 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4001 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4002
4003 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
4004 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
4005
4006 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4007
4008 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4009
4010 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4011 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4012 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4013
4014 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4015 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4016
4017 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4018 assignments may be used:
4019
4020 @smallexample
4021 floating_point = 0;
4022 SECTIONS
4023 @{
4024 .text :
4025 @{
4026 *(.text)
4027 _etext = .;
4028 @}
4029 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4030 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4031 @}
4032 @end smallexample
4033 @noindent
4034 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4035 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4036 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4037 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4038 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4039
4040 @node HIDDEN
4041 @subsection HIDDEN
4042 @cindex HIDDEN
4043 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4044 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4045
4046 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4047 @code{HIDDEN}:
4048
4049 @smallexample
4050 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4051 SECTIONS
4052 @{
4053 .text :
4054 @{
4055 *(.text)
4056 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4057 @}
4058 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4059 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4060 @}
4061 @end smallexample
4062 @noindent
4063 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4064
4065 @node PROVIDE
4066 @subsection PROVIDE
4067 @cindex PROVIDE
4068 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4069 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4070 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4071 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4072 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4073 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4074 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4075 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4076
4077 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4078 @smallexample
4079 SECTIONS
4080 @{
4081 .text :
4082 @{
4083 *(.text)
4084 _etext = .;
4085 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4086 @}
4087 @}
4088 @end smallexample
4089
4090 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4091 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4092 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4093 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4094 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4095 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4096
4097 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4098 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4099 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4100 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4101 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4102
4103 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4104 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4105 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4106 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4107 hidden and won't be exported.
4108
4109 @node Source Code Reference
4110 @subsection Source Code Reference
4111
4112 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4113 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4114 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4115 symbol that does not have a value.
4116
4117 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4118 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4119 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4120 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4121 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4122 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4123 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4124 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4125
4126 @smallexample
4127 extern int foo;
4128 @end smallexample
4129
4130 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4131
4132 @smallexample
4133 _foo = 1000;
4134 @end smallexample
4135
4136 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4137 transformation has taken place.
4138
4139 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4140 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4141 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4142 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4143 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4144 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4145 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4146
4147 @smallexample
4148 int foo = 1000;
4149 @end smallexample
4150
4151 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4152 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4153 number 1000 is initially stored.
4154
4155 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4156 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4157 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4158 So:
4159
4160 @smallexample
4161 foo = 1;
4162 @end smallexample
4163
4164 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4165 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4166 address. Whereas:
4167
4168 @smallexample
4169 int * a = & foo;
4170 @end smallexample
4171
4172 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4173 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4174 the variable @samp{a}.
4175
4176 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4177 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4178 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4179
4180 @smallexample
4181 foo = 1000;
4182 @end smallexample
4183
4184 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4185 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4186 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4187 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4188 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4189
4190 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4191 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4192 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4193 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4194 linker script contains these declarations:
4195
4196 @smallexample
4197 @group
4198 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4199 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4200 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4201 @end group
4202 @end smallexample
4203
4204 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4205
4206 @smallexample
4207 @group
4208 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4209
4210 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4211 @end group
4212 @end smallexample
4213
4214 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4215 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4216 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4217
4218 @smallexample
4219 @group
4220 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4221
4222 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4223 @end group
4224 @end smallexample
4225
4226 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4227 operators.
4228
4229 @node SECTIONS
4230 @section SECTIONS Command
4231 @kindex SECTIONS
4232 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4233 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4234
4235 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4236 @smallexample
4237 SECTIONS
4238 @{
4239 @var{sections-command}
4240 @var{sections-command}
4241 @dots{}
4242 @}
4243 @end smallexample
4244
4245 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4246
4247 @itemize @bullet
4248 @item
4249 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4250 @item
4251 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4252 @item
4253 an output section description
4254 @item
4255 an overlay description
4256 @end itemize
4257
4258 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4259 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4260 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4261 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4262 the layout of the output file.
4263
4264 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4265 below.
4266
4267 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4268 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4269 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4270 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4271 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4272 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4273
4274 @menu
4275 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4276 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4277 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4278 * Input Section:: Input section description
4279 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4280 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4281 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4282 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4283 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4284 @end menu
4285
4286 @node Output Section Description
4287 @subsection Output Section Description
4288 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4289 @smallexample
4290 @group
4291 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4292 [AT(@var{lma})]
4293 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4294 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4295 [@var{constraint}]
4296 @{
4297 @var{output-section-command}
4298 @var{output-section-command}
4299 @dots{}
4300 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4301 @end group
4302 @end smallexample
4303
4304 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4305
4306 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4307 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4308 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4309 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4310 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4311
4312 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4313
4314 @itemize @bullet
4315 @item
4316 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4317 @item
4318 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4319 @item
4320 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4321 @item
4322 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4323 @end itemize
4324
4325 @node Output Section Name
4326 @subsection Output Section Name
4327 @cindex name, section
4328 @cindex section name
4329 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4330 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4331 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4332 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4333 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4334 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4335 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4336 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4337 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4338 commas must be quoted.
4339
4340 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4341 Discarding}.
4342
4343 @node Output Section Address
4344 @subsection Output Section Address
4345 @cindex address, section
4346 @cindex section address
4347 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4348 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4349 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4350
4351 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4352 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4353 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4354 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4355 contained within the output section.
4356
4357 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4358
4359 @itemize @bullet
4360 @item
4361 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4362 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4363 in that region.
4364
4365 @item
4366 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4367 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4368 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4369 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4370
4371 @item
4372 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4373 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4374 counter.
4375 @end itemize
4376
4377 @noindent
4378 For example:
4379
4380 @smallexample
4381 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4382 @end smallexample
4383
4384 @noindent
4385 and
4386
4387 @smallexample
4388 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4389 @end smallexample
4390
4391 @noindent
4392 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4393 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4394 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4395 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4396 input sections.
4397
4398 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4399 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4400 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4401 do something like this:
4402 @smallexample
4403 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4404 @end smallexample
4405 @noindent
4406 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4407 aligned upward to the specified value.
4408
4409 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4410 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4411 sections are ignored).
4412
4413 @node Input Section
4414 @subsection Input Section Description
4415 @cindex input sections
4416 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4417 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4418
4419 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4420 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4421 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4422 map the input files into your memory layout.
4423
4424 @menu
4425 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4426 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4427 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4428 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4429 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4430 @end menu
4431
4432 @node Input Section Basics
4433 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4434 @cindex input section basics
4435 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4436 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4437
4438 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4439 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4440
4441 The most common input section description is to include all input
4442 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4443 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4444 @smallexample
4445 *(.text)
4446 @end smallexample
4447 @noindent
4448 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4449 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4450 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4451 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4452 example:
4453 @smallexample
4454 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4455 @end smallexample
4456 @noindent
4457 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4458 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4459 placed inside the section list, for example:
4460 @smallexample
4461 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4462 @end smallexample
4463 @noindent
4464 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4465 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4466 more than one section, as described below.
4467
4468 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4469 @smallexample
4470 *(.text .rdata)
4471 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4472 @end smallexample
4473 @noindent
4474 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4475 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4476 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4477 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4478 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4479 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4480
4481 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4482 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4483 immediately following section, for example:
4484 @smallexample
4485 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4486 @end smallexample
4487 @noindent
4488 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4489 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4490 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4491 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4492 could be modified to:
4493 @smallexample
4494 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4495 @end smallexample
4496 @noindent
4497 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4498 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4499 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4500 @smallexample
4501 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4502 @end smallexample
4503
4504 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4505 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4506 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4507 @smallexample
4508 data.o(.data)
4509 @end smallexample
4510
4511 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4512 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4513
4514 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4515
4516 @smallexample
4517 @group
4518 SECTIONS @{
4519 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4520 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4521 @}
4522 @end group
4523 @end smallexample
4524
4525 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4526 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4527 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4528 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4529 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4530
4531 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4532 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4533 with no whitespace around the colon.
4534
4535 @table @samp
4536 @item archive:file
4537 matches file within archive
4538 @item archive:
4539 matches the whole archive
4540 @item :file
4541 matches file but not one in an archive
4542 @end table
4543
4544 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4545 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4546 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4547 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4548 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4549 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4550 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4551 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4552 command.
4553
4554 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4555 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4556 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4557 @smallexample
4558 data.o
4559 @end smallexample
4560
4561 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4562 and does not contain any wild card
4563 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4564 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4565 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4566 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4567 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4568 the archive search path.
4569
4570 @node Input Section Wildcards
4571 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4572 @cindex input section wildcards
4573 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4574 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4575 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4576 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4577 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4578
4579 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4580 pattern for the file name.
4581
4582 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4583
4584 @table @samp
4585 @item *
4586 matches any number of characters
4587 @item ?
4588 matches any single character
4589 @item [@var{chars}]
4590 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4591 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4592 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4593 @item \
4594 quotes the following character
4595 @end table
4596
4597 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4598 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4599 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4600 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4601 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4602 a @samp{/} character.
4603
4604 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4605 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4606 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4607
4608 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4609 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4610 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4611 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4612 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4613 @smallexample
4614 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4615 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4616 @end smallexample
4617
4618 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4619 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4620 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4621 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4622 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4623 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4624 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4625
4626 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4627 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4628 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4629 alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4630 alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4631 needed.
4632
4633 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4634 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4635 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4636 numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4637 section name before placing them in the output file. In
4638 @code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4639 the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4640 @code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
4641
4642 @cindex SORT
4643 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4644
4645 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4646 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4647
4648 @enumerate
4649 @item
4650 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4651 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4652 sections have the same name.
4653 @item
4654 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4655 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4656 sections have the same alignment.
4657 @item
4658 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4659 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4660 @item
4661 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4662 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4663 @item
4664 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4665 @end enumerate
4666
4667 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4668 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4669 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4670
4671 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4672 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4673 treated as nested sorting command.
4674
4675 @enumerate
4676 @item
4677 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4678 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4679 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4680 @item
4681 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4682 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4683 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4684 @end enumerate
4685
4686 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4687 command-line option will be ignored.
4688
4689 @cindex SORT_NONE
4690 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4691 section sorting option.
4692
4693 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4694 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4695 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4696
4697 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4698 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4699 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4700 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4701 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4702 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4703 @smallexample
4704 @group
4705 SECTIONS @{
4706 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4707 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4708 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4709 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4710 @}
4711 @end group
4712 @end smallexample
4713
4714 @node Input Section Common
4715 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4716 @cindex common symbol placement
4717 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4718 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4719 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4720 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4721 named @samp{COMMON}.
4722
4723 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4724 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4725 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4726 input files are placed in another section.
4727
4728 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4729 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4730 @smallexample
4731 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4732 @end smallexample
4733
4734 @cindex scommon section
4735 @cindex small common symbols
4736 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4737 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4738 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4739 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4740 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4741 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4742 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4743 locations.
4744
4745 @cindex [COMMON]
4746 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4747 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4748 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4749
4750 @node Input Section Keep
4751 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4752 @cindex KEEP
4753 @cindex garbage collection
4754 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4755 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4756 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4757 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4758 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4759
4760 @node Input Section Example
4761 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4762 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4763 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4764 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4765 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4766 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4767 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4768 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4769 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4770 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4771
4772 @smallexample
4773 @group
4774 SECTIONS @{
4775 outputa 0x10000 :
4776 @{
4777 all.o
4778 foo.o (.input1)
4779 @}
4780 @end group
4781 @group
4782 outputb :
4783 @{
4784 foo.o (.input2)
4785 foo1.o (.input1)
4786 @}
4787 @end group
4788 @group
4789 outputc :
4790 @{
4791 *(.input1)
4792 *(.input2)
4793 @}
4794 @}
4795 @end group
4796 @end smallexample
4797
4798 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4799 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4800 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4801 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4802 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4803 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4804 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4805
4806 @node Output Section Data
4807 @subsection Output Section Data
4808 @cindex data
4809 @cindex section data
4810 @cindex output section data
4811 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4812 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4813 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4814 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4815 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4816 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4817 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4818 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4819 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4820 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4821 counter.
4822
4823 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4824 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4825 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4826 stored.
4827
4828 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4829 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4830 @smallexample
4831 BYTE(1)
4832 LONG(addr)
4833 @end smallexample
4834
4835 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4836 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4837 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4838 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4839 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4840
4841 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4842 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4843 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4844 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4845 endianness of the first input object file.
4846
4847 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4848 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4849 @smallexample
4850 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4851 @end smallexample
4852 whereas this will work:
4853 @smallexample
4854 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4855 @end smallexample
4856
4857 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4858 @cindex holes, filling
4859 @cindex unspecified memory
4860 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4861 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4862 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4863 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4864 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4865 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4866 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4867 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4868 different parts of an output section.
4869
4870 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4871 value @samp{0x90}:
4872 @smallexample
4873 FILL(0x90909090)
4874 @end smallexample
4875
4876 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4877 section attribute, but it only affects the
4878 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4879 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4880 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4881 expression.
4882
4883 @node Output Section Keywords
4884 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4885 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4886 commands.
4887
4888 @table @code
4889 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4890 @cindex input filename symbols
4891 @cindex filename symbols
4892 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4893 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4894 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4895 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4896 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4897
4898 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4899 normally used for any other object file format.
4900
4901 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4902 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4903 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4904 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4905 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4906 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4907 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4908 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4909 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4910 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4911 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4912 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4913 ignored for other object file formats.
4914
4915 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4916 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4917 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4918 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4919 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4920 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4921 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4922 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4923 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4924 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4925 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4926 @code{exit}.
4927
4928 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4929 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4930 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4931 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4932 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4933 runtime code expects to see.
4934
4935 @smallexample
4936 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4937 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4938 *(.ctors)
4939 LONG(0)
4940 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4941 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4942 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4943 *(.dtors)
4944 LONG(0)
4945 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4946 @end smallexample
4947
4948 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4949 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4950 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4951 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4952 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4953 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4954 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4955 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4956
4957 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4958 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4959 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4960 scripts.
4961
4962 @end table
4963
4964 @node Output Section Discarding
4965 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4966 @cindex discarding sections
4967 @cindex sections, discarding
4968 @cindex removing sections
4969 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4970 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4971 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4972 @smallexample
4973 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4974 @end smallexample
4975 @noindent
4976 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4977 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4978 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4979 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4980 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4981 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4982 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4983 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4984 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4985
4986 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4987 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4988 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4989 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4990 section is discarded.
4991
4992 @cindex /DISCARD/
4993 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4994 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4995 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4996
4997 Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
4998 discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
4999 members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5000 Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5001
5002 @node Output Section Attributes
5003 @subsection Output Section Attributes
5004 @cindex output section attributes
5005 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5006 like this:
5007
5008 @smallexample
5009 @group
5010 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
5011 [AT(@var{lma})]
5012 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
5013 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5014 [@var{constraint}]
5015 @{
5016 @var{output-section-command}
5017 @var{output-section-command}
5018 @dots{}
5019 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5020 @end group
5021 @end smallexample
5022
5023 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5024 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5025 remaining section attributes.
5026
5027 @menu
5028 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
5029 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5030 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5031 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5032 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5033 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
5034 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5035 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5036 @end menu
5037
5038 @node Output Section Type
5039 @subsubsection Output Section Type
5040 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5041 parentheses. The following types are defined:
5042
5043 @table @code
5044 @item NOLOAD
5045 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5046 loaded into memory when the program is run.
5047 @item DSECT
5048 @itemx COPY
5049 @itemx INFO
5050 @itemx OVERLAY
5051 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5052 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5053 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5054 section when the program is run.
5055 @end table
5056
5057 @kindex NOLOAD
5058 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5059 @cindex loading, preventing
5060 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5061 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5062 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5063 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5064 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5065 @smallexample
5066 @group
5067 SECTIONS @{
5068 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5069 @dots{}
5070 @}
5071 @end group
5072 @end smallexample
5073
5074 @node Output Section LMA
5075 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5076 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5077 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5078 @cindex load address
5079 @cindex section load address
5080 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5081 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5082 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5083 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5084 address is optional.
5085
5086 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5087 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5088 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5089 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5090 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5091
5092 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5093 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5094 load address:
5095
5096 @itemize @bullet
5097 @item
5098 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5099 the LMA address as well.
5100
5101 @item
5102 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5103
5104 @item
5105 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5106 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5107 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5108 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5109 the last section in the located region.
5110
5111 @item
5112 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5113 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5114
5115 @item
5116 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5117 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5118 @end itemize
5119
5120 @cindex ROM initialized data
5121 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5122 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5123 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5124 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5125 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5126 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5127 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5128 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5129 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5130
5131 @smallexample
5132 @group
5133 SECTIONS
5134 @{
5135 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5136 .mdata 0x2000 :
5137 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5138 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5139 .bss 0x3000 :
5140 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5141 @}
5142 @end group
5143 @end smallexample
5144
5145 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5146 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5147 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5148 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5149 script.
5150
5151 @smallexample
5152 @group
5153 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5154 char *src = &_etext;
5155 char *dst = &_data;
5156
5157 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5158 while (dst < &_edata)
5159 *dst++ = *src++;
5160
5161 /* Zero bss. */
5162 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5163 *dst = 0;
5164 @end group
5165 @end smallexample
5166
5167 @node Forced Output Alignment
5168 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5169 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5170 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5171 @cindex output section alignment
5172 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5173 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5174 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5175
5176 @node Forced Input Alignment
5177 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5178 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5179 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5180 @cindex input section alignment
5181 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5182 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5183 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5184
5185 @node Output Section Constraint
5186 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5187 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5188 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5189 @cindex constraints on output sections
5190 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5191 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5192 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5193 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5194
5195 @node Output Section Region
5196 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5197 @kindex >@var{region}
5198 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5199 @cindex memory regions and sections
5200 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5201 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5202
5203 Here is a simple example:
5204 @smallexample
5205 @group
5206 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5207 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5208 @end group
5209 @end smallexample
5210
5211 @node Output Section Phdr
5212 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5213 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5214 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5215 @cindex program headers and sections
5216 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5217 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5218 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5219 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5220 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5221 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5222
5223 Here is a simple example:
5224 @smallexample
5225 @group
5226 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5227 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5228 @end group
5229 @end smallexample
5230
5231 @node Output Section Fill
5232 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5233 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5234 @cindex section fill pattern
5235 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5236 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5237 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5238 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5239 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5240 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5241 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5242 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5243 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5244 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5245 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5246 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5247 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5248
5249 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5250 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5251
5252 Here is a simple example:
5253 @smallexample
5254 @group
5255 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5256 @end group
5257 @end smallexample
5258
5259 @node Overlay Description
5260 @subsection Overlay Description
5261 @kindex OVERLAY
5262 @cindex overlays
5263 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5264 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5265 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5266 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5267 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5268 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5269 than another.
5270
5271 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5272 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5273 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5274 command is as follows:
5275 @smallexample
5276 @group
5277 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5278 @{
5279 @var{secname1}
5280 @{
5281 @var{output-section-command}
5282 @var{output-section-command}
5283 @dots{}
5284 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5285 @var{secname2}
5286 @{
5287 @var{output-section-command}
5288 @var{output-section-command}
5289 @dots{}
5290 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5291 @dots{}
5292 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5293 @end group
5294 @end smallexample
5295
5296 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5297 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5298 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5299 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5300 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5301 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5302
5303 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5304 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5305
5306 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5307 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5308 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5309 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5310 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5311 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5312
5313 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5314 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5315 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5316 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5317 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5318
5319 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5320 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5321 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5322 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5323 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5324 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5325 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5326
5327 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5328 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5329
5330 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5331 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5332 @smallexample
5333 @group
5334 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5335 @{
5336 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5337 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5338 @}
5339 @end group
5340 @end smallexample
5341 @noindent
5342 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5343 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5344 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5345 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5346 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5347 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5348
5349 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5350 like the following.
5351
5352 @smallexample
5353 @group
5354 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5355 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5356 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5357 @end group
5358 @end smallexample
5359
5360 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5361 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5362 example could have been written identically as follows.
5363
5364 @smallexample
5365 @group
5366 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5367 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5368 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5369 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5370 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5371 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5372 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5373 @end group
5374 @end smallexample
5375
5376 @node MEMORY
5377 @section MEMORY Command
5378 @kindex MEMORY
5379 @cindex memory regions
5380 @cindex regions of memory
5381 @cindex allocating memory
5382 @cindex discontinuous memory
5383 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5384 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5385
5386 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5387 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5388 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5389 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5390 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5391 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5392 around to fit into the available regions.
5393
5394 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5395 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5396 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5397 @code{MEMORY} is:
5398 @smallexample
5399 @group
5400 MEMORY
5401 @{
5402 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5403 @dots{}
5404 @}
5405 @end group
5406 @end smallexample
5407
5408 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5409 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5410 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5411 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5412 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5413 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5414 command.
5415
5416 @cindex memory region attributes
5417 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5418 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5419 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5420 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5421 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5422 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5423 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5424
5425 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5426 @table @samp
5427 @item R
5428 Read-only section
5429 @item W
5430 Read/write section
5431 @item X
5432 Executable section
5433 @item A
5434 Allocatable section
5435 @item I
5436 Initialized section
5437 @item L
5438 Same as @samp{I}
5439 @item !
5440 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5441 @end table
5442
5443 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5444 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5445 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5446 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5447 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5448 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5449 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5450 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5451
5452 @kindex ORIGIN =
5453 @kindex o =
5454 @kindex org =
5455 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5456 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5457 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5458 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5459 @code{ORG}).
5460
5461 @kindex LENGTH =
5462 @kindex len =
5463 @kindex l =
5464 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5465 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5466 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5467 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5468
5469 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5470 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5471 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5472 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5473 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5474 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5475 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5476 region.
5477
5478 @smallexample
5479 @group
5480 MEMORY
5481 @{
5482 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5483 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5484 @}
5485 @end group
5486 @end smallexample
5487
5488 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5489 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5490 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5491 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5492 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5493 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5494 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5495 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5496 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5497
5498 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5499 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5500 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5501
5502 @smallexample
5503 @group
5504 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5505 @end group
5506 @end smallexample
5507
5508 @node PHDRS
5509 @section PHDRS Command
5510 @kindex PHDRS
5511 @cindex program headers
5512 @cindex ELF program headers
5513 @cindex program segments
5514 @cindex segments, ELF
5515 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5516 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5517 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5518 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5519
5520 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5521 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5522 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5523 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5524 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5525
5526 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5527 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5528 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5529 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5530 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5531
5532 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5533 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5534 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5535
5536 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5537 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5538
5539 @smallexample
5540 @group
5541 PHDRS
5542 @{
5543 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5544 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5545 @}
5546 @end group
5547 @end smallexample
5548
5549 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5550 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5551 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5552 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5553 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5554 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5555
5556 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5557 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5558 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5559 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5560 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5561 Section Phdr}.
5562
5563 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5564 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5565 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5566 contain the section.
5567
5568 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5569 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5570 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5571 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5572 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5573 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5574 segment at all.
5575
5576 @kindex FILEHDR
5577 @kindex PHDRS
5578 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5579 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5580 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5581 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5582 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5583 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5584 these keywords.
5585
5586 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5587 value of the keyword.
5588
5589 @table @asis
5590 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5591 Indicates an unused program header.
5592
5593 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5594 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5595 the file.
5596
5597 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5598 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5599
5600 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5601 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5602 found.
5603
5604 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5605 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5606
5607 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5608 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5609 ABI.
5610
5611 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5612 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5613
5614 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5615 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5616
5617 @item @var{expression}
5618 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5619 be used for types not defined above.
5620 @end table
5621
5622 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5623 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5624 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5625 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5626 output section attribute.
5627
5628 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5629 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5630 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5631 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5632 header.
5633
5634 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5635 headers used on a native ELF system.
5636
5637 @example
5638 @group
5639 PHDRS
5640 @{
5641 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5642 interp PT_INTERP ;
5643 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5644 data PT_LOAD ;
5645 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5646 @}
5647
5648 SECTIONS
5649 @{
5650 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5651 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5652 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5653 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5654 @dots{}
5655 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5656 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5657 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5658 @dots{}
5659 @}
5660 @end group
5661 @end example
5662
5663 @node VERSION
5664 @section VERSION Command
5665 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5666 @cindex symbol versions
5667 @cindex version script
5668 @cindex versions of symbols
5669 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5670 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5671 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5672 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5673 shared library.
5674
5675 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5676 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5677 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5678
5679 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5680 @smallexample
5681 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5682 @end smallexample
5683
5684 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5685 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5686 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5687 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5688 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5689 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5690 library.
5691
5692 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5693 examples.
5694
5695 @smallexample
5696 VERS_1.1 @{
5697 global:
5698 foo1;
5699 local:
5700 old*;
5701 original*;
5702 new*;
5703 @};
5704
5705 VERS_1.2 @{
5706 foo2;
5707 @} VERS_1.1;
5708
5709 VERS_2.0 @{
5710 bar1; bar2;
5711 extern "C++" @{
5712 ns::*;
5713 "f(int, double)";
5714 @};
5715 @} VERS_1.2;
5716 @end smallexample
5717
5718 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5719 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5720 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5721 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5722 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5723 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5724 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5725 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5726 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5727 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5728
5729 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5730 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5731 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5732
5733 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5734 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5735 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5736
5737 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5738 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5739 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5740 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5741 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5742 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5743 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5744 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5745 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5746
5747 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5748 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5749 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5750 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5751
5752 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5753 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5754 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5755 won't.
5756
5757 @smallexample
5758 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5759 @end smallexample
5760
5761 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5762 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5763 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5764 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5765 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5766 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5767 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5768 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5769 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5770 search for each symbol reference.
5771
5772 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5773 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5774 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5775 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5776 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5777 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5778 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5779 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5780 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5781
5782 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5783 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5784 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5785 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5786 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5787 @smallexample
5788 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5789 @end smallexample
5790 @noindent
5791 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5792 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5793 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5794 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5795 takes precedence over a version script.
5796
5797 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5798 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5799 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5800 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5801 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5802
5803 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5804 source file. Here is an example:
5805
5806 @smallexample
5807 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5808 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5809 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5810 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5811 @end smallexample
5812
5813 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5814 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5815 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5816 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5817
5818 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5819 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5820 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5821 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5822 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5823 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5824
5825 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5826 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5827 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5828 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5829
5830 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5831
5832 @smallexample
5833 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5834 @end smallexample
5835
5836 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5837 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5838 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5839 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5840 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5841
5842 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5843 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5844 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5845 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5846 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5847 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5848 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5849 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5850 expect when you upgrade.
5851
5852 @node Expressions
5853 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5854 @cindex expressions
5855 @cindex arithmetic
5856 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5857 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5858 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5859 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5860
5861 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5862
5863 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5864 expressions.
5865
5866 @menu
5867 * Constants:: Constants
5868 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5869 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5870 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5871 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5872 * Operators:: Operators
5873 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5874 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5875 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5876 @end menu
5877
5878 @node Constants
5879 @subsection Constants
5880 @cindex integer notation
5881 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5882 All constants are integers.
5883
5884 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5885 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5886 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5887 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5888 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5889 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5890
5891 @cindex scaled integers
5892 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5893 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5894 @cindex suffixes for integers
5895 @cindex integer suffixes
5896 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5897 constant by
5898 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5899 @ifnottex
5900 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5901 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5902 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5903 @end ifnottex
5904 @tex
5905 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5906 @end tex
5907 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5908 respectively. For example, the following
5909 all refer to the same quantity:
5910
5911 @smallexample
5912 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5913 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5914 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5915 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5916 @end smallexample
5917
5918 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5919 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5920
5921 @node Symbolic Constants
5922 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5923 @cindex symbolic constants
5924 @kindex CONSTANT
5925 It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
5926 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5927
5928 @table @code
5929 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5930 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5931 The target's maximum page size.
5932
5933 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5934 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5935 The target's default page size.
5936 @end table
5937
5938 So for example:
5939
5940 @smallexample
5941 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5942 @end smallexample
5943
5944 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5945 supported by the target.
5946
5947 @node Symbols
5948 @subsection Symbol Names
5949 @cindex symbol names
5950 @cindex names
5951 @cindex quoted symbol names
5952 @kindex "
5953 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5954 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5955 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5956 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5957 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5958 @smallexample
5959 "SECTION" = 9;
5960 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5961 @end smallexample
5962
5963 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5964 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5965 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5966
5967 @node Orphan Sections
5968 @subsection Orphan Sections
5969 @cindex orphan
5970 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5971 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5972 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5973 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5974 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5975
5976 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5977 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5978 placed at the end of that output section.
5979
5980 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5981 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5982 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5983 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5984 one new output section.
5985
5986 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5987 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5988 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5989 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5990 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5991 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5992 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5993
5994 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5995 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
5996 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5997
5998 @node Location Counter
5999 @subsection The Location Counter
6000 @kindex .
6001 @cindex dot
6002 @cindex location counter
6003 @cindex current output location
6004 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6005 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6006 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6007 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6008 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6009
6010 @cindex holes
6011 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6012 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
6013 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6014 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6015 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6016
6017 @smallexample
6018 SECTIONS
6019 @{
6020 output :
6021 @{
6022 file1(.text)
6023 . = . + 1000;
6024 file2(.text)
6025 . += 1000;
6026 file3(.text)
6027 @} = 0x12345678;
6028 @}
6029 @end smallexample
6030 @noindent
6031 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6032 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6033 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6034 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6035 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6036 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6037
6038 @cindex dot inside sections
6039 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6040 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6041 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6042 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6043 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6044 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6045
6046 @smallexample
6047 SECTIONS
6048 @{
6049 . = 0x100
6050 .text: @{
6051 *(.text)
6052 . = 0x200
6053 @}
6054 . = 0x500
6055 .data: @{
6056 *(.data)
6057 . += 0x600
6058 @}
6059 @}
6060 @end smallexample
6061
6062 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6063 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6064 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6065 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6066 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6067 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6068 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6069 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6070
6071 @cindex dot outside sections
6072 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6073 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6074 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6075
6076 @smallexample
6077 SECTIONS
6078 @{
6079 start_of_text = . ;
6080 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6081 end_of_text = . ;
6082
6083 start_of_data = . ;
6084 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6085 end_of_data = . ;
6086 @}
6087 @end smallexample
6088
6089 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6090 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6091 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6092 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6093 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6094 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6095 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6096 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6097 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6098 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6099 as follows:
6100
6101 @smallexample
6102 SECTIONS
6103 @{
6104 start_of_text = . ;
6105 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6106 end_of_text = . ;
6107
6108 start_of_data = . ;
6109 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6110 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6111 end_of_data = . ;
6112 @}
6113 @end smallexample
6114
6115 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6116 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6117 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6118 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6119 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6120 section. So you could write:
6121
6122 @smallexample
6123 SECTIONS
6124 @{
6125 start_of_text = . ;
6126 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6127 end_of_text = . ;
6128
6129 . = . ;
6130 start_of_data = . ;
6131 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6132 end_of_data = . ;
6133 @}
6134 @end smallexample
6135
6136 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6137 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6138
6139 @need 2000
6140 @node Operators
6141 @subsection Operators
6142 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6143 @cindex arithmetic operators
6144 @cindex precedence in expressions
6145 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6146 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6147 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6148 @ifnottex
6149 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6150 @smallexample
6151 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6152 (highest)
6153 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6154 2 left * / %
6155 3 left + -
6156 4 left >> <<
6157 5 left == != > < <= >=
6158 6 left &
6159 7 left |
6160 8 left &&
6161 9 left ||
6162 10 right ? :
6163 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6164 (lowest)
6165 @end smallexample
6166 Notes:
6167 (1) Prefix operators
6168 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6169 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6170 @end ifnottex
6171 @tex
6172 \vskip \baselineskip
6173 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6174 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6175 \hrule
6176 \halign
6177 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6178 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6179 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6180 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6181 \noalign{\hrule}
6182 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6183 &highest&&&&&\cr
6184 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6185 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6186 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6187 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6188 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6189 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6190 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6191 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6192 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6193 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6194 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6195 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6196 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6197 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6198 \hrule}
6199 @end tex
6200 @iftex
6201 {
6202 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6203 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6204 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6205 }
6206 @end iftex
6207 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6208
6209 @node Evaluation
6210 @subsection Evaluation
6211 @cindex lazy evaluation
6212 @cindex expression evaluation order
6213 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6214 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6215
6216 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6217 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6218 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6219 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6220
6221 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6222 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6223 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6224 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6225
6226 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6227 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6228 allocation.
6229
6230 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6231 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6232
6233 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6234 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6235 following
6236 @smallexample
6237 @group
6238 SECTIONS
6239 @{
6240 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6241 @{ *(.text) @}
6242 @}
6243 @end group
6244 @end smallexample
6245 @noindent
6246 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6247 address}.
6248
6249 @node Expression Section
6250 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6251 @cindex expression sections
6252 @cindex absolute expressions
6253 @cindex relative expressions
6254 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6255 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6256 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6257 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6258 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6259 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6260 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6261 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6262 operations.
6263
6264 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6265 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6266 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6267 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6268 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6269 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6270 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6271 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6272 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6273 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6274 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6275 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6276 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6277 everywhere.
6278
6279 In the following simple example,
6280
6281 @smallexample
6282 @group
6283 SECTIONS
6284 @{
6285 . = 0x100;
6286 __executable_start = 0x100;
6287 .data :
6288 @{
6289 . = 0x10;
6290 __data_start = 0x10;
6291 *(.data)
6292 @}
6293 @dots{}
6294 @}
6295 @end group
6296 @end smallexample
6297
6298 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6299 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6300 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6301 section in the second two assignments.
6302
6303 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6304 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6305
6306 @itemize @bullet
6307 @item
6308 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6309 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6310 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6311 @item
6312 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6313 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6314 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6315 @item
6316 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6317 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6318 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6319 before applying the operator.
6320 @end itemize
6321
6322 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6323
6324 @itemize @bullet
6325 @item
6326 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6327 @item
6328 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6329 @item
6330 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6331 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6332 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6333 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6334 but an absolute address otherwise.
6335 @item
6336 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6337 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6338 section as the relative operand(s).
6339 @item
6340 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6341 conversions) is an absolute address.
6342 @end itemize
6343
6344 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6345 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6346 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6347 section @samp{.data}:
6348 @smallexample
6349 SECTIONS
6350 @{
6351 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6352 @}
6353 @end smallexample
6354 @noindent
6355 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6356 @samp{.data} section.
6357
6358 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6359 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6360
6361 @node Builtin Functions
6362 @subsection Builtin Functions
6363 @cindex functions in expressions
6364 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6365 use in linker script expressions.
6366
6367 @table @code
6368 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6369 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6370 @cindex expression, absolute
6371 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6372 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6373 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6374 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6375
6376 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6377 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6378 @cindex section address in expression
6379 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6380 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6381 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6382 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6383 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6384 the other two will be absolute:
6385 @smallexample
6386 @group
6387 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6388 .output1 :
6389 @{
6390 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6391 @dots{}
6392 @}
6393 .output :
6394 @{
6395 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6396 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6397 @}
6398 @dots{} @}
6399 @end group
6400 @end smallexample
6401
6402 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6403 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6404 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6405 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6406 @cindex round up location counter
6407 @cindex align location counter
6408 @cindex round up expression
6409 @cindex align expression
6410 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6411 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6412 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6413 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6414 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6415 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6416
6417 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6418 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6419 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6420 input sections:
6421 @smallexample
6422 @group
6423 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6424 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6425 *(.data)
6426 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6427 @}
6428 @dots{} @}
6429 @end group
6430 @end smallexample
6431 @noindent
6432 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6433 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6434 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6435 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6436
6437 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6438
6439 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6440 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6441 @cindex section alignment
6442 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6443 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6444 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6445 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6446 value in that section.
6447 @smallexample
6448 @group
6449 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6450 .output @{
6451 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6452 @dots{}
6453 @}
6454 @dots{} @}
6455 @end group
6456 @end smallexample
6457
6458 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6459 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6460 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6461 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6462 section.
6463
6464 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6465 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6466 This is equivalent to either
6467 @smallexample
6468 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6469 @end smallexample
6470 or
6471 @smallexample
6472 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6473 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6474 @end smallexample
6475 @noindent
6476 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6477 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6478 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6479 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6480 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6481 bytes in the on-disk file.
6482
6483 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6484 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6485 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6486 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6487 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6488 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6489 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6490
6491 @noindent
6492 Example:
6493 @smallexample
6494 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6495 @end smallexample
6496
6497 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6498 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6499 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6500 evaluation purposes.
6501
6502 @smallexample
6503 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6504 @end smallexample
6505
6506 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6507 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6508 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6509 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6510 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6511 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6512 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6513 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6514 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6515 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6516 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6517 section alignment.
6518
6519 @smallexample
6520 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6521 @end smallexample
6522
6523 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6524 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6525 @cindex symbol defaults
6526 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6527 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6528 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6529 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6530 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6531 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6532 existed, its value is preserved:
6533
6534 @smallexample
6535 @group
6536 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6537 .text : @{
6538 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6539 @dots{}
6540 @}
6541 @dots{}
6542 @}
6543 @end group
6544 @end smallexample
6545
6546 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6547 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6548 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6549
6550 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6551 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6552 @cindex section load address in expression
6553 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6554 Section LMA}).
6555
6556 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6557 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6558 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6559 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6560
6561 @kindex MAX
6562 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6563 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6564
6565 @kindex MIN
6566 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6567 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6568
6569 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6570 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6571 @cindex unallocated address, next
6572 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6573 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6574 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6575 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6576
6577 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6578 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6579 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6580
6581 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6582 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6583 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6584 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6585 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6586 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6587 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6588 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6589 name.
6590
6591 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6592 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6593 @cindex section size
6594 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6595 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6596 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6597 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6598 @smallexample
6599 @group
6600 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6601 .output @{
6602 .start = . ;
6603 @dots{}
6604 .end = . ;
6605 @}
6606 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6607 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6608 @dots{} @}
6609 @end group
6610 @end smallexample
6611
6612 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6613 @itemx sizeof_headers
6614 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6615 @cindex header size
6616 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6617 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6618 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6619 choose, to facilitate paging.
6620
6621 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6622 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6623 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6624 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6625 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6626 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6627 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6628 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6629 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6630 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6631 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6632 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6633 @end table
6634
6635 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6636 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6637 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6638 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6639 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6640 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6641 linker will report an error.
6642
6643 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6644
6645 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6646 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6647 commands.
6648
6649 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6650 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6651 read. This can affect archive searching.
6652
6653 @ifset GENERIC
6654 @node Machine Dependent
6655 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6656
6657 @cindex machine dependencies
6658 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6659 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6660 functionality are not listed.
6661
6662 @menu
6663 @ifset H8300
6664 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6665 @end ifset
6666 @ifset M68HC11
6667 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6668 @end ifset
6669 @ifset ARM
6670 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6671 @end ifset
6672 @ifset HPPA
6673 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6674 @end ifset
6675 @ifset M68K
6676 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6677 @end ifset
6678 @ifset MIPS
6679 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6680 @end ifset
6681 @ifset MMIX
6682 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6683 @end ifset
6684 @ifset MSP430
6685 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6686 @end ifset
6687 @ifset NDS32
6688 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6689 @end ifset
6690 @ifset NIOSII
6691 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6692 @end ifset
6693 @ifset POWERPC
6694 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6695 @end ifset
6696 @ifset POWERPC64
6697 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6698 @end ifset
6699 @ifset S/390
6700 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6701 @end ifset
6702 @ifset SPU
6703 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6704 @end ifset
6705 @ifset TICOFF
6706 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6707 @end ifset
6708 @ifset WIN32
6709 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6710 @end ifset
6711 @ifset XTENSA
6712 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6713 @end ifset
6714 @end menu
6715 @end ifset
6716
6717 @ifset H8300
6718 @ifclear GENERIC
6719 @raisesections
6720 @end ifclear
6721
6722 @node H8/300
6723 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6724
6725 @cindex H8/300 support
6726 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6727 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6728
6729 @table @emph
6730 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6731 @item relaxing address modes
6732 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6733 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6734 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6735 respectively.
6736
6737 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6738 @item synthesizing instructions
6739 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6740 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6741 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6742 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6743 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6744 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6745 top page of memory).
6746
6747 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6748 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6749 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6750 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6751 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6752 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6753 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6754
6755 @item bit manipulation instructions
6756 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6757 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6758 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6759 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6760 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6761 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6762 the top page of memory).
6763
6764 @item system control instructions
6765 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6766 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6767 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6768 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6769 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6770 the top page of memory).
6771 @end table
6772
6773 @ifclear GENERIC
6774 @lowersections
6775 @end ifclear
6776 @end ifset
6777
6778 @ifclear GENERIC
6779 @ifset Renesas
6780 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6781 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6782 @node Renesas
6783 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6784
6785 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6786 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6787 options are required for these chips.
6788 @end ifset
6789 @end ifclear
6790
6791 @ifset ARM
6792 @ifclear GENERIC
6793 @raisesections
6794 @end ifclear
6795
6796 @ifset M68HC11
6797 @ifclear GENERIC
6798 @raisesections
6799 @end ifclear
6800
6801 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6802 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6803
6804 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6805
6806 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6807
6808 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6809 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6810
6811 @table @emph
6812 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6813 @item relaxing address modes
6814 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6815 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6816 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6817 respectively.
6818
6819 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6820 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6821 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6822
6823 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6824 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6825 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6826 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6827 @code{bset} instructions.
6828
6829 @end table
6830
6831 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6832
6833 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6834 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6835 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6836 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6837 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6838 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6839 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6840 point to the function trampoline.
6841
6842 @ifclear GENERIC
6843 @lowersections
6844 @end ifclear
6845 @end ifset
6846
6847 @node ARM
6848 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6849
6850 @cindex ARM interworking support
6851 @kindex --support-old-code
6852 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6853 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6854 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6855 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6856 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6857 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6858 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6859 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6860 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6861 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6862
6863 @cindex thumb entry point
6864 @cindex entry point, thumb
6865 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6866 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6867 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6868 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6869 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6870 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6871
6872 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6873 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6874 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6875 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6876 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6877 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6878
6879 @cindex BE8
6880 @kindex --be8
6881 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6882 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6883 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6884 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6885 little-endian code.
6886
6887 @cindex TARGET1
6888 @kindex --target1-rel
6889 @kindex --target1-abs
6890 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6891 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6892 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6893 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6894
6895 @cindex TARGET2
6896 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6897 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6898 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6899 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6900 @table @samp
6901 @item rel
6902 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6903 @item abs
6904 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6905 @item got-rel
6906 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6907 @end table
6908
6909 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6910 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6911 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6912 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6913 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6914 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6915
6916 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6917 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6918 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6919
6920 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6921 relocations are ignored.
6922
6923 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6924 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6925 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6926 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6927
6928 @smallexample
6929 TST rM, #1
6930 MOVEQ PC, rM
6931 BX Rn
6932 @end smallexample
6933
6934 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6935 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6936 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6937
6938 @cindex USE_BLX
6939 @kindex --use-blx
6940 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6941 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6942 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6943 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6944 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6945
6946 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6947 specify it if you are using that target.
6948
6949 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6950 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6951 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6952 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6953 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6954 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6955 the support code can read the intended values.
6956
6957 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6958 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6959 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6960 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6961 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6962 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6963
6964 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6965 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6966 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6967 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6968 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6969 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6970
6971 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6972 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6973 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6974 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6975 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6976 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6977 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6978
6979 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6980 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6981 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6982 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6983 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6984 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6985 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6986
6987 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6988 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6989 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6990
6991 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6992 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6993
6994 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6995 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6996 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6997 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6998 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6999 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7000 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7001 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7002
7003 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7004 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7005
7006 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7007 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7008 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7009 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7010 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7011
7012 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7013 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7014 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7015 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7016 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7017 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7018
7019 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7020 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7021
7022 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7023 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7024 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7025 occurs.
7026
7027 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7028 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7029 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7030 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7031 occurs.
7032
7033 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7034 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7035 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7036 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7037 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7038 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7039 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7040 not be diagnosed.
7041
7042 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7043 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7044 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7045 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7046 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7047 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7048 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7049
7050 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7051 @kindex --pic-veneer
7052 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7053 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7054 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7055 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7056
7057 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7058 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7059 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7060 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7061 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7062 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7063 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7064 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7065 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7066 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7067 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7068 where they should be placed.
7069
7070 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7071 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7072 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7073 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7074 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7075 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7076 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7077 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7078 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7079 from the input sections.
7080
7081 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7082 @samp{N = +1}.
7083
7084 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7085 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7086 otherwise.
7087
7088 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7089 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7090 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7091 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7092
7093 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7094
7095 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7096 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7097 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7098 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7099
7100 Please contact ARM for further details.
7101
7102 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7103 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7104 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7105 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7106
7107 @kindex --long-plt
7108 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7109 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7110 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7111 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7112
7113 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7114 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7115 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7116 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7117
7118 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7119 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7120 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7121 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7122 veneers in memory.
7123
7124 @kindex --cmse-implib
7125 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7126 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7127 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7128 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7129 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7130
7131 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7132 @cindex Input import library
7133 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7134 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7135 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7136 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7137 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7138 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7139 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7140 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7141 specified.
7142
7143 @ifclear GENERIC
7144 @lowersections
7145 @end ifclear
7146 @end ifset
7147
7148 @ifset HPPA
7149 @ifclear GENERIC
7150 @raisesections
7151 @end ifclear
7152
7153 @node HPPA ELF32
7154 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7155 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7156 @kindex --multi-subspace
7157 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7158 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7159 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7160 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7161 multiple sub-spaces.
7162
7163 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7164 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7165 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7166 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7167 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7168 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7169 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7170 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7171 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7172 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7173 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7174 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7175 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7176 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7177 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7178 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7179
7180 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7181 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7182 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7183 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7184
7185 @ifclear GENERIC
7186 @lowersections
7187 @end ifclear
7188 @end ifset
7189
7190 @ifset M68K
7191 @ifclear GENERIC
7192 @raisesections
7193 @end ifclear
7194
7195 @node M68K
7196 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7197
7198 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7199 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7200 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7201 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7202 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7203 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7204 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7205 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7206 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7207 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7208 support such GOTs.
7209 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7210 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7211 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7212 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7213
7214 @ifclear GENERIC
7215 @lowersections
7216 @end ifclear
7217 @end ifset
7218
7219 @ifset MIPS
7220 @ifclear GENERIC
7221 @raisesections
7222 @end ifclear
7223
7224 @node MIPS
7225 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7226
7227 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7228 @kindex --insn32
7229 @kindex --no-insn32
7230 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7231 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7232 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7233 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7234 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7235 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7236
7237 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7238 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7239 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7240 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7241 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7242 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7243 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7244 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7245 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7246 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7247 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7248 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7249
7250 @ifclear GENERIC
7251 @lowersections
7252 @end ifclear
7253 @end ifset
7254
7255 @ifset MMIX
7256 @ifclear GENERIC
7257 @raisesections
7258 @end ifclear
7259
7260 @node MMIX
7261 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7262 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7263 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7264 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7265 can translate between the two formats.
7266
7267 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7268 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7269 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7270 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7271 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7272 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7273 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7274 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7275
7276 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7277 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7278 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7279 of a section.
7280
7281 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7282 are left out from an mmo file.
7283
7284 @ifclear GENERIC
7285 @lowersections
7286 @end ifclear
7287 @end ifset
7288
7289 @ifset MSP430
7290 @ifclear GENERIC
7291 @raisesections
7292 @end ifclear
7293
7294 @node MSP430
7295 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7296 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7297 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7298 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7299
7300 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7301 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7302
7303 @table @code
7304 @item @samp{.vectors}
7305 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7306
7307 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7308 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7309 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7310
7311 @item @samp{.infomem}
7312 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7313 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7314
7315 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7316 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7317 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7318
7319 @item @samp{.noinit}
7320 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7321
7322 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7323 @end table
7324
7325 @table @option
7326 @cindex MSP430 Options
7327 @kindex --code-region
7328 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7329 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7330 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7331 using this option.
7332
7333 @kindex --data-region
7334 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7335 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7336 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7337 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7338
7339 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7340 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7341 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7342 and @code{--data-region} options.
7343 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7344 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7345 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7346 @end table
7347
7348 @ifclear GENERIC
7349 @lowersections
7350 @end ifclear
7351 @end ifset
7352
7353 @ifset NDS32
7354 @ifclear GENERIC
7355 @raisesections
7356 @end ifclear
7357
7358 @node NDS32
7359 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7360 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7361 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7362 relaxes objects according to these options.
7363
7364 @table @code
7365 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7366 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7367
7368 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7369 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7370
7371 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7372 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7373
7374 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7375 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7376
7377 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7378 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7379
7380 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7381 Update the existing EX9 table.
7382
7383 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7384 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7385
7386 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7387 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7388
7389 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7390 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7391
7392 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7393 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7394 @end table
7395
7396 @ifclear GENERIC
7397 @lowersections
7398 @end ifclear
7399 @end ifset
7400
7401 @ifset NIOSII
7402 @ifclear GENERIC
7403 @raisesections
7404 @end ifclear
7405
7406 @node Nios II
7407 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7408 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7409 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7410
7411 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7412 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7413 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7414 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7415 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7416 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7417 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7418 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7419 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7420 larger than 256MB.
7421
7422 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7423 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7424 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7425 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7426 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7427 register as a temporary.
7428
7429 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7430 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7431 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7432
7433 @ifclear GENERIC
7434 @lowersections
7435 @end ifclear
7436 @end ifset
7437
7438 @ifset POWERPC
7439 @ifclear GENERIC
7440 @raisesections
7441 @end ifclear
7442
7443 @node PowerPC ELF32
7444 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7445 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7446 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7447 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7448 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7449 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7450 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7451 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7452 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7453 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7454 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7455 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7456 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7457
7458 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7459 @table @option
7460 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7461 @kindex --bss-plt
7462 @item --bss-plt
7463 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7464 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7465 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7466 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7467 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7468 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7469 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7470 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7471
7472 @kindex --secure-plt
7473 @item --secure-plt
7474 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7475 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7476 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7477 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7478 style BSS PLT.
7479
7480 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7481 @kindex --sdata-got
7482 @item --sdata-got
7483 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7484 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7485 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7486 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7487 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7488 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7489 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7490 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7491 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7492 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7493 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7494 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7495
7496 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7497 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7498 @item --emit-stub-syms
7499 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7500 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7501
7502 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7503 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7504 @item --no-tls-optimize
7505 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7506 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7507 disable the optimization.
7508 @end table
7509
7510 @ifclear GENERIC
7511 @lowersections
7512 @end ifclear
7513 @end ifset
7514
7515 @ifset POWERPC64
7516 @ifclear GENERIC
7517 @raisesections
7518 @end ifclear
7519
7520 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7521 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7522
7523 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7524 @table @option
7525 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7526 @kindex --stub-group-size
7527 @item --stub-group-size
7528 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7529 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7530 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7531 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7532 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7533 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7534 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7535 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7536 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7537 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7538 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7539 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7540 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7541 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7542
7543 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7544 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7545 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7546 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7547
7548 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7549 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7550 @item --emit-stub-syms
7551 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7552 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7553
7554 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7555 @kindex --dotsyms
7556 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7557 @item --dotsyms
7558 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7559 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7560 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7561 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7562 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7563 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7564 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7565 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7566 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7567 feature.
7568
7569 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7570 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7571 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7572 @item --save-restore-funcs
7573 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7574 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7575 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7576 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7577 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7578 link.
7579
7580 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7581 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7582 @item --no-tls-optimize
7583 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7584 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7585 disable the optimization.
7586
7587 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7588 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7589 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7590 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7591 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7592 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7593 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7594 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7595 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7596 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7597 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7598 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7599 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7600 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7601 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7602
7603 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7604 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7605 @item --no-opd-optimize
7606 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7607 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7608 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7609 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7610
7611 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7612 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7613 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7614 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7615 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7616 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7617 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7618
7619 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7620 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7621 @item --no-toc-optimize
7622 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7623 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7624 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7625 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7626 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7627 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7628 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7629 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7630 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7631 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7632 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7633 optimization.
7634
7635 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7636 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7637 @item --no-multi-toc
7638 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7639 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7640 where TOC
7641 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7642 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7643 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7644 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7645 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7646 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7647 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7648 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7649
7650 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7651 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7652 @item --no-toc-sort
7653 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7654 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7655 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7656 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7657 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7658 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7659 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7660 off this feature.
7661
7662 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7663 @kindex --plt-align
7664 @kindex --no-plt-align
7665 @item --plt-align
7666 @itemx --no-plt-align
7667 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7668 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7669 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7670 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7671 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7672 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7673 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7674
7675 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7676 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7677 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7678 @item --plt-static-chain
7679 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7680 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7681 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7682 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7683
7684 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7685 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7686 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7687 @item --plt-thread-safe
7688 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7689 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7690 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7691 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7692 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7693 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7694 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7695 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7696 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7697 default behaviour.
7698
7699 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7700 @kindex --plt-localentry
7701 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7702 @item --plt-localentry
7703 @itemx --no-localentry
7704 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7705 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7706 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7707 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7708 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7709 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7710 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7711 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7712 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7713 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7714 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7715 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7716 @end table
7717
7718 @ifclear GENERIC
7719 @lowersections
7720 @end ifclear
7721 @end ifset
7722
7723 @ifset S/390
7724 @ifclear GENERIC
7725 @raisesections
7726 @end ifclear
7727
7728 @node S/390 ELF
7729 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7730
7731 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7732 @table @option
7733
7734 @cindex S/390
7735 @kindex --s390-pgste
7736 @item --s390-pgste
7737 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7738 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7739 binaries marked that way.
7740 @end table
7741
7742 @ifclear GENERIC
7743 @lowersections
7744 @end ifclear
7745 @end ifset
7746
7747 @ifset SPU
7748 @ifclear GENERIC
7749 @raisesections
7750 @end ifclear
7751
7752 @node SPU ELF
7753 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7754
7755 @cindex SPU ELF options
7756 @table @option
7757
7758 @cindex SPU plugins
7759 @kindex --plugin
7760 @item --plugin
7761 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7762
7763 @cindex SPU overlays
7764 @kindex --no-overlays
7765 @item --no-overlays
7766 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7767 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7768 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7769 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7770
7771 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7772 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7773 @item --emit-stub-syms
7774 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7775 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7776
7777 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7778 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7779 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7780 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7781 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7782 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7783
7784 @cindex SPU local store size
7785 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7786 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7787 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7788 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7789 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7790
7791 @cindex SPU
7792 @kindex --stack-analysis
7793 @item --stack-analysis
7794 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7795 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7796 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7797 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7798 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7799 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7800 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7801 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7802 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7803 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7804 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7805 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7806 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7807 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7808 and calls will be given.
7809
7810 @cindex SPU
7811 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7812 @item --emit-stack-syms
7813 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7814 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7815 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7816 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7817 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7818 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7819 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7820 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7821 @end table
7822
7823 @ifclear GENERIC
7824 @lowersections
7825 @end ifclear
7826 @end ifset
7827
7828 @ifset TICOFF
7829 @ifclear GENERIC
7830 @raisesections
7831 @end ifclear
7832
7833 @node TI COFF
7834 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7835 @cindex TI COFF versions
7836 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7837 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7838 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7839 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7840 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7841 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7842
7843 @ifclear GENERIC
7844 @lowersections
7845 @end ifclear
7846 @end ifset
7847
7848 @ifset WIN32
7849 @ifclear GENERIC
7850 @raisesections
7851 @end ifclear
7852
7853 @node WIN32
7854 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7855
7856 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7857 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7858 command-line options mentioned here.
7859
7860 @table @emph
7861 @cindex import libraries
7862 @item import libraries
7863 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7864 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7865 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7866 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7867 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7868 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
7869
7870 @item exporting DLL symbols
7871 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7872 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7873
7874 @table @emph
7875 @item using auto-export functionality
7876 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7877 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7878 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
7879
7880 @itemize
7881 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7882 @item --exclude-symbols
7883 @item --exclude-libs
7884 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7885 @item --version-script
7886 @end itemize
7887
7888 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7889 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7890 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7891 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7892 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7893 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7894 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7895 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7896
7897 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7898 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7899 if either of the following are true:
7900
7901 @itemize
7902 @item A DEF file is used.
7903 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7904 @end itemize
7905
7906 @item using a DEF file
7907 @cindex using a DEF file
7908 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7909 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7910 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7911 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7912 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7913
7914 @example
7915 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7916 @end example
7917
7918 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7919 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7920
7921 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7922
7923 @example
7924 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7925
7926 EXPORTS
7927 foo
7928 bar
7929 _bar = bar
7930 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7931 var1 DATA
7932 doo = foo == foo2
7933 eoo DATA == var1
7934 @end example
7935
7936 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7937 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7938 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7939 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7940 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7941 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7942 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7943 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7944 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7945
7946 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7947 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7948 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7949
7950 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7951 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7952 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7953 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7954
7955 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7956 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7957 non-default base address for the image.
7958
7959 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7960 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7961 filename specified on the command line.
7962
7963 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7964
7965 @example
7966 EXPORTS
7967 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7968 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7969 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7970 @end example
7971
7972 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7973 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7974 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7975 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7976 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7977 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7978 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7979
7980 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7981
7982 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7983 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7984 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7985 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7986 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7987
7988 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7989 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7990 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7991 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7992
7993 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7994 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7995 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7996 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7997 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7998 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7999 application will behave unexpectedly.
8000
8001 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8002 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8003 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
8004 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
8005 the DLL without an import library.
8006
8007 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8008 other DEF file statements
8009
8010 @cindex creating a DEF file
8011 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
8012 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
8013
8014 @item Using decorations
8015 @cindex Using decorations
8016 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8017 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8018 declared as:
8019
8020 @example
8021 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8022 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8023 @end example
8024
8025 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8026 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8027 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8028 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8029
8030 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8031 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8032 instead:
8033
8034 @example
8035 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8036 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8037 @end example
8038
8039 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8040 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8041 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8042 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8043 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8044 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8045 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8046 information.
8047 @end table
8048
8049 @cindex automatic data imports
8050 @item automatic data imports
8051 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8052 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8053 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8054 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8055 code to these platforms, especially for large
8056 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8057 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8058 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8059 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8060 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8061 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8062 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8063 trigger the feature's use.
8064
8065 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8066 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8067
8068 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8069 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8070
8071 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8072 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8073 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8074 below.
8075
8076 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8077 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8078 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8079 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8080 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8081 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8082 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8083 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8084 references.
8085
8086 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8087 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8088 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8089 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8090 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8091 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8092 run without error on an older system.
8093
8094 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8095 enabled as needed.
8096
8097 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8098 @item direct linking to a dll
8099 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8100 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8101 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8102 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8103 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8104 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8105 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8106 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8107 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8108 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8109
8110 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8111 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8112 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8113 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8114 select the dll instead of an import library.
8115
8116
8117 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8118 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8119
8120 @example
8121 libxxx.dll.a
8122 xxx.dll.a
8123 libxxx.a
8124 xxx.lib
8125 libxxx.lib
8126 cygxxx.dll (*)
8127 libxxx.dll
8128 xxx.dll
8129 @end example
8130
8131 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8132
8133 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8134 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8135 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8136 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8137 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8138
8139 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8140 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8141 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8142 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8143 could coexist on the same machine.
8144
8145 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8146 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8147 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8148
8149 @example
8150 bin/
8151 cygxxx.dll
8152 lib/
8153 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8154 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8155 @end example
8156
8157 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8158 done two ways:
8159
8160 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8161 @example
8162 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8163 @end example
8164
8165 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8166 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8167 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8168 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8169
8170 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8171 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8172 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8173 making the app/dll.
8174
8175 @example
8176 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8177 @end example
8178
8179 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8180
8181 @example
8182 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8183 @end example
8184
8185 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8186 perfectly legal
8187
8188 @example
8189 bin/
8190 cygxxx-5.dll
8191 lib/
8192 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8193 @end example
8194
8195 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8196 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8197 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8198
8199 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8200 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8201
8202 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8203 work with auto-imported data.
8204
8205 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8206 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8207 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8208 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8209 possible to do this without an import lib.
8210
8211 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8212 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8213 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8214 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8215
8216 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8217 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8218 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8219 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8220 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8221 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8222 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8223
8224 @item symbol aliasing
8225 @table @emph
8226 @item adding additional names
8227 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8228 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8229 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8230 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8231 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8232
8233 @example
8234 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8235
8236 EXPORTS
8237 foo
8238 _foo = foo
8239 @end example
8240
8241 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8242
8243 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8244 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8245
8246 @example
8247 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8248 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8249 @end example
8250
8251 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8252 symbols.
8253
8254 @item renaming symbols
8255 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8256 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8257 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8258 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8259 created). In the following example:
8260
8261 @example
8262 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8263
8264 EXPORTS
8265 _foo = foo
8266 @end example
8267
8268 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8269 @samp{_foo}.
8270 @end table
8271
8272 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8273 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8274 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8275 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8276 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8277 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8278 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8279 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8280 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8281 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8282 which is probably not what you wanted.
8283
8284 @cindex weak externals
8285 @item weak externals
8286 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8287 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8288 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8289 are three variants of weak externals:
8290 @itemize
8291 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8292 called lazy externals.
8293 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8294 This form is not presently implemented.
8295 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8296 implemented.
8297 @end itemize
8298 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8299 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8300 uses a default value.
8301
8302 @cindex aligned common symbols
8303 @item aligned common symbols
8304 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8305 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8306 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8307 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8308 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8309 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8310 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8311 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8312
8313 @end table
8314
8315 @ifclear GENERIC
8316 @lowersections
8317 @end ifclear
8318 @end ifset
8319
8320 @ifset XTENSA
8321 @ifclear GENERIC
8322 @raisesections
8323 @end ifclear
8324
8325 @node Xtensa
8326 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8327
8328 @cindex Xtensa processors
8329 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8330 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8331 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8332 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8333 example, with the command:
8334
8335 @smallexample
8336 SECTIONS
8337 @{
8338 .text : @{
8339 *(.literal .text)
8340 @}
8341 @}
8342 @end smallexample
8343
8344 @noindent
8345 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8346 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8347 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8348 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8349 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8350 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8351 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8352
8353 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8354 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8355 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8356 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8357 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8358 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8359 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8360 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8361 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8362 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8363 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8364 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8365
8366 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8367 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8368 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8369 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8370 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8371 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8372 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8373 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8374 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8375 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8376 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8377 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8378 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8379 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8380
8381 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8382 control the linker:
8383
8384 @cindex Xtensa options
8385 @table @option
8386 @item --size-opt
8387 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8388 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8389 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8390 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8391 preserve the correctness of the code.
8392 @end table
8393
8394 @ifclear GENERIC
8395 @lowersections
8396 @end ifclear
8397 @end ifset
8398
8399 @ifclear SingleFormat
8400 @node BFD
8401 @chapter BFD
8402
8403 @cindex back end
8404 @cindex object file management
8405 @cindex object formats available
8406 @kindex objdump -i
8407 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8408 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8409 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8410 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8411 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8412 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8413 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8414 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8415 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8416
8417 @cindex BFD requirements
8418 @cindex requirements for BFD
8419 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8420 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8421 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8422 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8423 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8424 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8425 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8426
8427 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8428 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8429 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8430 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8431
8432 @menu
8433 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8434 @end menu
8435
8436 @node BFD outline
8437 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8438 @cindex opening object files
8439 @include bfdsumm.texi
8440 @end ifclear
8441
8442 @node Reporting Bugs
8443 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8444 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8445 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8446
8447 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8448
8449 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8450 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8451 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8452 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8453 @command{ld}.
8454
8455 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8456 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8457
8458 @menu
8459 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8460 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8461 @end menu
8462
8463 @node Bug Criteria
8464 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8465 @cindex bug criteria
8466
8467 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8468
8469 @itemize @bullet
8470 @cindex fatal signal
8471 @cindex linker crash
8472 @cindex crash of linker
8473 @item
8474 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8475 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8476
8477 @cindex error on valid input
8478 @item
8479 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8480
8481 @cindex invalid input
8482 @item
8483 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8484 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8485 object files are correct.
8486
8487 @item
8488 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8489 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8490 @end itemize
8491
8492 @node Bug Reporting
8493 @section How to Report Bugs
8494 @cindex bug reports
8495 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8496
8497 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8498 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8499 recommend you contact that organization first.
8500
8501 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8502 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8503 distribution.
8504
8505 @ifset BUGURL
8506 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8507 @value{BUGURL}.
8508 @end ifset
8509
8510 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8511 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8512 fact or leave it out, state it!
8513
8514 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8515 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8516 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8517 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8518 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8519 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8520 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8521 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8522 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8523 and the most helpful.
8524
8525 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8526 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8527 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8528
8529 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8530 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8531 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8532 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8533
8534 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8535
8536 @itemize @bullet
8537 @item
8538 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8539 the @samp{--version} argument.
8540
8541 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8542 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8543
8544 @item
8545 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8546 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8547
8548 @item
8549 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8550 version number.
8551
8552 @item
8553 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8554 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8555
8556 @item
8557 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8558 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8559 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8560 sufficient.
8561
8562 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8563 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8564
8565 @item
8566 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8567 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8568 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8569 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8570 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8571 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8572 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8573 attachments are best.
8574
8575 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8576 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8577 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8578 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8579 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8580
8581 @item
8582 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8583 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8584
8585 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8586 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8587 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8588 a chance to make a mistake.
8589
8590 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8591 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8592 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8593 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8594 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8595 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8596 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8597 any conclusion from our observations.
8598
8599 @item
8600 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8601 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8602 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8603 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8604 context, not by line number.
8605
8606 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8607 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8608 @end itemize
8609
8610 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8611
8612 @itemize @bullet
8613 @item
8614 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8615
8616 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8617 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8618 changes will not affect it.
8619
8620 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8621 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8622 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8623 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8624
8625 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8626 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8627 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8628 less time, and so on.
8629
8630 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8631 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8632
8633 @item
8634 A patch for the bug.
8635
8636 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8637 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8638 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8639 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8640
8641 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8642 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8643 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8644 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8645 fixed.
8646
8647 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8648 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8649 help us to understand.
8650
8651 @item
8652 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8653
8654 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8655 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8656 @end itemize
8657
8658 @node MRI
8659 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8660 @cindex MRI compatibility
8661 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8662 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8663 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8664 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8665 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8666 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8667 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8668
8669 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8670 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8671 features to make use of them.
8672
8673 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8674 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8675
8676 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8677 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8678 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8679 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8680 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8681
8682 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8683
8684 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8685 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8686 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8687
8688 @table @code
8689 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8690 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8691 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8692 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8693 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8694 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8695 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8696 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8697 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8698 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8699 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8700
8701 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8702 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8703 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8704 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8705
8706 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8707
8708 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8709 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8710 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8711 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8712
8713 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8714 @item BASE @var{expression}
8715 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8716 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8717
8718 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8719 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8720 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8721 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8722
8723 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8724 @item END
8725 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8726
8727 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8728 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8729 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8730 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8731
8732 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8733 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8734 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8735 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8736
8737 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8738 same line, with no change in its effect.
8739
8740 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8741 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8742 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8743 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8744 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8745 command line.
8746
8747 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8748 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8749 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8750 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8751 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8752
8753 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8754 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8755 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8756 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8757 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8758 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8759 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8760 file, in the order specified.
8761
8762 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8763 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8764 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8765 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8766 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8767 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8768
8769 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8770 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8771 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8772 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8773 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8774 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8775 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8776 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8777 @end table
8778
8779 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8780 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8781 @include fdl.texi
8782
8783 @node LD Index
8784 @unnumbered LD Index
8785
8786 @printindex cp
8787
8788 @tex
8789 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8790 % meantime:
8791 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8792 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8793 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8794 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8795 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8796 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8797 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8798 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8799 \page\colophon
8800 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8801 @end tex
8802
8803 @bye
This page took 0.256387 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.